JVC Flat Panel Television GM X50U User Manual
PLASMA DISPLAY MONITOR  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GM-X50U  
For Customer Use:  
Enter below the Model No. and the Serial  
No. which is located on the rear panel of the  
cabinet. Retain this information for future  
reference.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
MENU INPUT  
LCT1601-001A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
FCC NOTICE  
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to  
correct the interference at his own expense.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION  
WARNING:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This unit has been engineered and manufactured to assure  
your personal safety. But IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE  
HAZARD. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated into this product, observe the following basic rules for  
its installation, use and service. Please read these “Important Safeguards” carefully before use.  
– All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.  
– The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.  
– All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.  
– All operating instructions should be followed.  
– Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp  
cloth for cleaning.  
– Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust around the intakes (all the  
openings) on the rear. If a vacuum is not available, use a cloth and wipe it off.  
Failure to do so will cause internal heat buildup and, therefore, cause damage  
to the product.  
– Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as  
they may be hazardous.  
– Do not use this product near water. Do not use immediately after moving from  
a low temperature to high temperature, as this causes condensation, which  
may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
– Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product  
may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. The product should be mounted  
according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mount recommended by the manufacturer.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– When the product is used on a cart, care should be taken to avoid quick stops, excessive force, and  
uneven surfaces which may cause the product and cart to overturn, damaging equipment or causing  
possible injury to the operator.  
– Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. These ensure reliable operation of the  
product and protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. (The openings  
should never be blocked by placing the product on bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface. It should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided and the manufacturer’s instructions have  
been adhered to.)  
For proper ventilation, separate the product from other equipment, which may prevent ventilation and keep distance  
more than 10 cm (3 15/16 inches).  
– This product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the  
type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company.  
– This product is equipped with a three-wire plug. This plug will fit only into a grounded power outlet. If you are unable to  
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the  
grounded plug.  
– Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or  
against them. Pay particular attention to cords at doors, plugs, receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
product.  
– For added protection of this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods  
of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power line surges.  
– Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or convenience receptacles on other equipment as this can result in a  
risk of fire or electric shock.  
– Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short  
out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
– Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages  
and other hazards. Refer all service to qualified service personnel.  
– Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer service to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:  
a)When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b)If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen on the product.  
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d)If the product operated normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered  
by the Operation Manual, as an improper adjustment of controls may result in damage and will often require  
extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
e)If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this indicates a need for service.  
– When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the  
manufacturer or with same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric  
shock, or other hazards.  
– Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper operating condition.  
– The product should be placed more than 30 cm (11 15/16 inches) away from heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, and other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
– When connecting other products such as VCR’s, and personal computers, you should turn off the power of this product  
for protection against electric shock.  
– Do not place combustibles behind the cooling fan. For example, cloth, paper, matches, aerosol cans or gas lighters that  
present special hazards when over heated.  
– Use only the accessory cord designed for this product to prevent shock.  
–
Option terminal: This terminal is intended exclusively to be used to drive the fan motor.  
Do not connect any plugs to the terminal other than JVC’s recommended optional parts.  
Polarity of terminal  
POWER CONNECTION  
The power supply voltage rating of this product is AC 120 V.  
Do not use other power cords than the power cord attached to this unit.  
For U.S.A. and Canada: AC 120 V  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts Identification  
Monitor: Front View  
1
2
MENU INPUT  
MENU INPUT  
Bottom View  
3
4
5
6
1 Remote sensor/power lamp  
5 INPUT button (page 14)  
Point the front end of the wireless remote control toward  
here.  
When the Monitor is turned on, the power lamp glows  
green. It glows orange in standby mode.  
Use this button to switch between inputs.  
To select the COMPONENT or RGB B input, you have to  
set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly on the menu (see page  
20).  
2 Self-diagnostic lamps (page 37)  
These lamps light/flash if something abnormal occurs  
with the Monitor.  
6
button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn on and off (on standby) the  
Monitor when the POWER switch on the rear of the  
Monitor is “| (on).”  
3 2 / 3 / 5 / ∞ buttons  
Use these buttons to select menu items and to make  
adjustments.  
• When no menu is displayed, you can use the 2 / 3  
buttons to adjust the volume level.  
4 MENU button  
Use this button to display or erase menus.  
While a sub-menu is displayed, pressing this button will  
move you one screen back to the preceding menu.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitor: Rear Views 1  
1
2
3
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
R
R
R
Y/G  
Pb/B  
Pr/R  
HD/Cs  
VD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Y/C IN  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
COMPONENT/RGB B  
1 VIDEO A terminals (page 11)  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
3 COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals (page 11)  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
Connect these terminals to the audio output terminals of  
the other equipment.  
Connect these terminals to the audio input terminals of a  
VCR, etc.  
VIDEO IN terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
G, B, R, HD/Cs, VD (VIDEO) input terminals (BNC)  
Connect these terminals to the following output terminals  
of a personal computer or other equipment:  
– Analog RGB signal output terminals  
– Horizontal sync (HD) signal or composite (Cs) signal  
output terminal  
VIDEO OUT terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the video input terminal of  
another monitor, etc.  
– Vertical sync (VD) signal output terminal  
Note:  
Notes:  
• Since the video output terminals on this Monitor are  
loop-through terminals, the devices connected to this  
video output terminal should be correctly terminated.  
Otherwise, pictures become abnormally bright or the  
Monitor screen gets affected abnormally.  
• External sync signals are automatically detected when  
they come in.  
• When both horizontal (HD)/vertical (VD) sync and  
composite (Cs) sync are connected, HD/VD sync signals  
will be used.  
2 VIDEO B terminals (page 11)  
Y, Pb, Pr (VIDEO) input terminals (BNC)  
Connect these terminals to the component signal output  
terminals of NTSC or high-vision equipment.  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
Connect these terminals to the audio output terminals of a  
VCR, etc.  
Y/C (S video) IN terminal (mini DIN 4pin)  
Connect this terminal to the S-video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
Note:  
• When these terminals are used as the component  
terminals (Y, Pb, Pr)—see “Setting the COMPONENT/  
RGB B Input” on page 20, external sync signals (HD/Cs,  
VD) cannot be used.  
VIDEO IN terminal (pin jack)  
Connect this terminal to the video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
Note:  
• When both the video and S-video terminals are  
connected, the S-video terminal will have priority.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts Identification  
(Continued)  
Monitor: Rear Views 2  
1
2
3
OPTION  
SPEAKER OUT  
R
L
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
4
5
6
7
8
OUT  
AUDIO  
L
MAKE  
R
IN  
RS-232C  
REMOTE  
WIRED  
POWER  
RGB A  
AUDIO  
AC IN  
1 OPTION terminal (page 13)  
5 REMOTE terminals (page 12)  
Connect the power cord of the Cooling Fan Unit (not  
supplied) when installing the Monitor vertically.  
RS-232C terminal (D-sub, 9 pin)  
Connect to the RS-232C terminal of a personal computer.  
For the control method using this terminal, consult an  
authorized JVC dealer.  
2 SPEAKER OUT L/R terminals (page 13)  
Connect external speakers, such as unique JVC speakers  
(not supplied), etc.  
MAKE terminal (mini DIN, 4pin)  
Connect an external control unit. (See page 12.)  
WIRED terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect a wired remote control unit to this terminal.  
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL (built-in speaker/external  
speaker) selecting switch (page 13)  
INTERNAL:  
EXTERNAL:  
To use built-in speakers.  
To use external speakers.  
Note:  
• When the above three terminals are used at the same  
time, transmitted commands through the MAKE  
terminal have priority over those through the other  
terminals.  
4 RGB A input terminals (page 12)  
Input terminal (D-sub, 15 pin)  
Connect to the video output terminal of a personal  
computer.  
6 AUDIO OUT terminals (pin jack) (page 12)  
Connect to the audio input terminals of external  
equipment such as an amplifier.  
Note:  
• Use a cord as short as possible when connecting a  
personal computer to this terminal. (Recommended  
length is within 3 m.)  
7 AC IN terminal (page 12)  
Connect the supplied power cord to this terminal.  
AUDIO IN terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect to the audio output terminal of a personal  
computer.  
8 POWER switch (page 14)  
When this switch is set to “| (on),” you can turn on and  
off (on standby) the Monitor by using the POWER button  
on the remote control or the  
button on the Monitor.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control  
1
2
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
3
4
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
INPUT SELECT  
9
p
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
INPUT SELECT  
RGB A  
COMPO.  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
A
/(RGB B)  
5
6
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
MENU/EXIT  
7
8
MENU/EXIT  
1 Remote control cable jack (page 12)  
7 2 / 3 / 5 / ∞ buttons  
Connect the remote control cable (not supplied) when  
using this remote control as a wired remote control.  
Use these buttons to select menu items or make  
adjustments.  
2 Remote signal transmission window  
8 MENU/EXIT button  
Use this button to display or erase menus.  
While a sub-menu is displayed, pressing this button will  
move you one screen back to the preceding menu.  
3 POWER ON/OFF button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn on and off (on standby) the  
Monitor when the POWER switch on the rear of the  
Monitor is “| (on).”  
9 ASPECT button (page 15)  
Use this button to switch between aspect ratios. Each time  
you press the button, the aspect ratio changes as follows:  
4 DISPLAY button (page 14)  
Use this button to display the input terminal, color system  
(for VIDEO A or VIDEO B input), scan system (for  
COMPONENT input) and horizontal/vertical frequency  
(for RGB A and RGB B input).  
REGULAR  
FULL  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
p VOLUME + / – buttons (page 14)  
5 INPUT SELECT (VIDEO A, VIDEO B, COMPO./(RGB B) and  
RGB A) buttons  
Use these buttons to adjust the volume level.  
(page 14)  
Use these buttons to switch between inputs.  
To select the COMPONENT or RGB B input, you have to  
set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly on the menu (see page  
20).  
6 MUTING button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn off the volume immediately.  
Pressing the button again will resume the previous  
volume level.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparations  
Checking the Accessories  
The following accessories are included with the Monitor. Check for them. If any item is missing, please contact the dealer where  
you purchased the Monitor.  
• Remote control (RM-C579) x 1  
• Power cord x 1  
• Batteries (AA/R6P) x 2  
• Ferrite core x 2  
Installing the Batteries  
Put the batteries in the remote control as follows. If the remote control has become erratic in operation, change the batteries.  
1 Remove the back cover.  
While pushing the release lever on the cover, remove the cover in  
the direction of the arrow.  
2 Place the batteries.  
Put the two supplied batteries (AA/R6P), noting the ª and ·  
markings, as shown.  
3 Replace the back cover as illustrated.  
Make sure the release lever on the cover is locked in place correctly.  
Precautions for using batteries  
If batteries are used improperly, the liquid could leak out, causing a fire, injury, etc. or dirtying the vicinity.  
Take notice of the following:  
• Do not mix old and new batteries.  
• Do not mix different types of battery as different types may have different characteristics.  
• Place the batteries according to the ª and · markings indicated on the battery compartment.  
• When installing the batteries, insert the · end first to avoid a short circuit.  
• Use only the specified batteries.  
• When you are not using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.  
• When the batteries have reached the end of their life, replace them with new ones immediately. Otherwise, the liquid may leak  
out, or malfunction may be caused by the leaked liquid. If the leaked liquid contacts your skin, wipe off the liquid with a soft  
cloth. If the affected skin is left as is, you may get a rough skin.  
• Do not throw the batteries into fire or try recharging them.  
• The service life of batteries is six months to one year for normal use. The supplied batteries are only for checking the operation  
and their life may be shorter. When the remote control operation becomes erratic, replace with new batteries.  
About the Supplied Ferrite Core  
Be sure to attach the supplied ferrite cores to the speaker cords when using external speakers to reduce interference from the  
Monitor with external devices. See page 13.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Precautions  
• When installing the Monitor vertically, make sure the following:  
–Attach the external cooling fan unit to the Monitor. (See “Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit“ on page 13.)  
–Set the speed of the internal cooling fan to “HIGH.” (See “Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan“ on page 25.)  
• When installing the Monitor, be sure to use a dedicated Stand Unit, Wall Mounting Unit, or Monitor Hanger Unit, depending  
on a particular case. Ask your dealer for installation.  
• When installing the Monitor in a special way (for example, installing it diagonally), consult your dealer.  
• Route the power cord and connection cables along wall or floor corners to avoid walking on them.  
• For good heat dissipation, try to leave the following distances of space (minimum) around the Monitor.  
• The ambient temperature of the installation place should be within the range of 0˚C to 40˚C (slightly variable depending on  
ambient conditions for installation.)  
• When installing the Monitor in a place, such as near the ceiling, the remote control may not work correctly because of possible  
effects from the surroundings. If this happens, use the remote control as a wired remote control or move the Monitor where it  
is free from these effects.  
When installing the Monitor on a stand  
Front View  
Side View  
200 (77  
/
8)  
50  
(2)  
Wall  
150  
(6)  
150  
(6)  
MENU INPUT  
50 (2)  
Unit: mm (inch)  
Take measures against the Monitor from overturning:  
To protect against abnormal events such as earthquakes and to prevent unexpected accidents, take appropriate measures  
for preventing the Monitor from overturning; should it overturn, this could lead to personal injury.  
For detailed information, refer to the manual supplied for the stand.  
When mounting the Monitor on the wall  
When hanging the Monitor from the ceiling  
Front View  
Side View  
Side View  
50(2)  
200 (77  
/8)  
200  
7
(7  
)
8
/
100  
(4)  
100  
(4)  
50  
(2)  
MENU INPUT  
100 (4)  
Unit: mm (inch)  
Unit: mm (inch)  
Notes:  
• Do not allow the same image (pattern) to be continuously displayed on the screen for a long time; otherwise, the area on the  
screen corresponding to the image may vary in brightness, leaving an afterimage on the screen. To reduce the afterimage, you  
can use the Color Reverse function and the Refresh function (see pages 28 and 29).  
• The Monitor is manufactured using very high-precision technology, allowing for more than 99.99% active pixels, however, be  
aware that only a slight number of pixels may be deficient or lit at all times.  
• Do not install the Monitor in such a way that the Monitor and other AV equipment affect each other adversely. (For example,  
if a disturbed image or noise due to electromagnetic interference occurs, or if the infrared remote control malfunctions, change  
the installation place.)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Precautions  
• Before making connections, turn off all the equipment.  
• Use a cord whose plugs are correctly matching for the terminals on this Monitor and the equipment.  
• Plugs should be firmly inserted; poor connection could cause noise.  
• To unplug a cord, be sure to grasp its plug and pull it out.  
• Connect the power cord after having finished all other connections.  
• Refer also to the user manual of each piece of equipment.  
Available Signals  
Video signals  
The following signals can be input to this Monitor:  
• VIDEO A and VIDEO B terminals accept — NTSC, PAL M, and PAL N signals.  
• COMPONENT/RGB B terminals accept — 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), and 1080/50i signals.  
(You need to set “COMPO./RGB B” to “COMPO.” on the menu (see page 20).  
Computer signals (Preset)  
This Monitor has 27 preset video modes for the most popular industrial standard, and the signals of the following image  
resolutions can be input to the RGB input terminals.  
Screen resolution  
Horizontal  
Horizontal  
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)  
Vertical  
No.  
Signal name  
Scan system  
Vertical  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PC98  
640  
640  
640  
852  
640  
640  
800  
800  
800  
400  
400  
480  
480  
480  
480  
600  
600  
600  
600  
768  
768  
768  
768  
768  
864  
1024  
1024  
1200  
1200  
1200  
480  
624  
768  
870  
—
24.8  
31.5  
31.5  
31.7  
37.9  
37.5  
35.2  
37.9  
48.1  
46.9  
48.4  
48.4  
56.5  
60.0  
68.7  
67.5  
64.0  
80.0  
75.0  
81.3  
87.5  
35.0  
49.7  
60.2  
68.7  
15.7  
15.6  
56.4  
70.1  
59.9  
60.3  
72.8  
75.0  
56.3  
60.3  
72.2  
75.0  
60.0  
60.0  
70.1  
75.0  
85.0  
75.0  
60.0  
75.0  
60.0  
65.0  
70.0  
66.7  
74.6  
74.9  
75.1  
59.9  
50.0  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Interlace  
VGA400-70  
VGA480-60  
WVGA-60  
VGA480-72  
VGA480-75  
SVGA-56  
SVGA-60  
SVGA-72  
SVGA-75  
XGA-60  
10  
800  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
1024  
1366  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1152  
1280  
1280  
1600  
1600  
1600  
640  
WXGA-60  
XGA-70  
XGA-75  
XGA-85  
XGA+-75  
SXGA-60  
SXGA-75  
UXGA-60  
UXGA-65  
UXGA-70  
MAC13”  
MAC16”  
MAC19”  
MAC21”  
RGB15K-60  
RGB15K-50  
832  
1024  
1152  
—
—
—
Interlace  
Notes:  
• When a signal other than listed above is input, a part of the screen may become void or an unnecessary picture may appear.  
• Signals, though they are within the acceptable range of frequencies, may not be displayed normally, depending on the signal  
type.  
• Depending on the connected equipment, the Monitor may not be compatible with composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signals.  
• When a preset mode signal is input, the vertical frequency displayed on the screen will have an “*” shown at its right top  
position.  
• When the No. 4 and No. 12 signals are input, change the aspect ratio to “FULL” with the ASPECT button (page 15) on the  
remote control or from the “FUNCTION SELECT” menu (see page 19).  
• When No. 16 to No. 21 and No. 25 signals are input, thin lines may become obscure for their signal frequencies are higher  
than the screen resolution. Using the RGB A input terminals makes the lines clearer than using the RGB B input terminals.  
• The adjustment of the screen size and position is the setting common to the No. 14 and No. 24 signals. If you use both signals  
by switching them, the adjustment of either signal may not be proper.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection Diagrams  
AV connections  
VCR 1  
DVD player, etc.  
VCR 2  
(used as the playback source)  
(used as the playback source)  
(used as the playback source)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
R
R
R
Y/G  
Pb/B  
Pr/R  
HD/Cs  
VD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Y/C IN  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
COMPONENT/RGB B  
When connecting another PC to the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals, set the “COMPO./RGB B” setting to  
“RGB B” (see page 20).  
To audio output  
To G output  
To B output  
Personal computer  
To R output  
(used as the playback  
source)  
To HD/Cs output  
To VD output  
Notes:  
• You can connect another VCR or Monitor to the VIDEO A OUT terminal. However, when connecting a VCR to the  
VIDEO A terminals, do not connect both IN and OUT terminals to the same VCR.  
• When connecting a VCR to the VIDEO B terminals, you can use either the video or S-video terminals. If the both  
terminals are used, S-video terminal will have priority.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
(Continued)  
Typical connections  
❊ For connection, see “Connecting an  
External Control Unit” below.  
Personal computer  
Personal computer  
Remote control  
(used to control the Monitor)  
(used as the playback source)  
(supplied)  
M E N U / E X I T  
Amplifier, etc.  
O
V L U M E  
M U T I N G  
V I D E O  
A B G  
B
A
R
B )  
.
/ ( R C G O B M P O  
I N P U T S E L E C T  
A S P E C T  
Y
D I S P L A  
O F F  
O N  
W E  
P R O  
U N I T O L  
C O N  
T
T
E
R
R E M O C – 5 7 9 R M  
Cable with stereo  
mini jacks  
(not supplied)  
Power cord (supplied)  
❊
To a wall outlet  
OUT  
AUDIO  
IN  
L
MAKE  
R
RS-232C  
WIRED  
REMOTE  
RGB A  
AUDIO  
AC IN  
POWER  
Connecting an External Control Unit  
When connecting the external control unit to the MAKE terminal, you can operate the following functions through the MAKE  
terminal;  
• Turn on or off the Monitor.  
Preparation: The POWER switch on the rear must be set to “| (on)” (so that the Monitor is in standby mode).  
• Select the input.  
Preparation: “REMOTE SWITCH” should be set correctly to select your desired input (see page 24).  
Notes:  
• There is no remote control on/off switch. When a plug is inserted to the MAKE terminal, remote control through the external  
control unit is automatically activated.  
• When the other REMOTE terminals are used at the same time, transmitted commands through the MAKE terminal have  
priority over those through the other terminals.  
• MAKE terminal  
• External control unit  
Pin number Signal name  
Signals  
transmitted  
6
4
2
5
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
GND  
TTL level  
SW2  
=
=
=
H: Power Off  
H: Input A*  
L: Power On  
SW1  
L: Input B*  
SW DET  
GND  
H: Not connected  
L: Connected  
*
Input A and Input B will be determined by the “REMOTE  
SWITCH” setting.  
IMPORTANT:  
External control unit is not commercially available in the market. When you need it, consult your dealer.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External Speaker Connection  
External speakers  
(Ex. TS-C500SPG)  
Note:  
It is recommended to use the  
speaker unit—TS-C500SPG  
(not supplied) as the external  
speakers. You can also  
connect any speakers of the  
following specifications:  
• Impedance: Between 6 Ω  
and 8 Ω  
When using external  
speakers, set this to  
EXTERNAL.  
• Power handling capacity:  
More than 3 W  
To speaker  
To speaker  
input terminals  
input terminals  
Ferrite core (supplied)  
How to connect the cords  
Attach the supplied ferrite cores to the speaker cords when using external speakers.  
Attach the ferrite cores as near to the SPEAKER OUT L/R terminals on the rear panel  
of the Monitor as possible.  
How to attach the ferrite core  
Caution:  
• Do not short-circuit the 9 and (  
speaker cords each other. (Refer also to  
the instructions supplied with the  
speaker unit when connecting  
speakers.)  
Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit  
When installing this Monitor vertically, it is  
required to attach the external cooling fan  
unit (not supplied).  
Note:  
• When installing this Monitor vertically, it is  
also required to set the speed of the internal  
cooling fan to “HIGH” (see page 25).  
• If you install the Monitor in such a way not  
instructed in this manual (for example,  
installing it diagonally), the cooling fan unit  
may not be able to cool down the internal  
heat enough to make the Monitor operate;  
therefore, reinstallation or another method  
for cooling will be required. Consult your  
dealer in such a case.  
Cooling Fan Unit:  
TS-C01FANG  
(not supplied)  
ACIN  
L
R
OTU  
ADUIO  
MKAE  
WRIED  
R-S32C  
ROMTE  
OTPINO  
RBGA  
ADUIO  
IN  
• For more detailed connection, refer to the  
manual supplied with the external cooling  
fan unit.  
Cooling Fan Unit:  
TS-C01FANG  
(not supplied)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Daily Operations  
1 Turn on the main power.  
Set the POWER switch on the rear of the Monitor to “|  
(on)”.  
Rear View  
The power lamp on the upper left of the front panel  
lights orange.  
• If you have turned off the Monitor not by using  
POWER ON on the remote control (or  
on the front  
panel), but by using the POWER switch, setting the  
power switch to “| (on)” lights the power lamp green  
and turns the Monitor on.  
2 Turn on the power.  
Press POWER ON on the remote control to turn the power  
on.  
The power lamp lights green.  
• You can also use  
turn on the Monitor.  
on the front panel (lower right) to  
1
3 Select an input.  
Select the desired input by pressing INPUT SELECT  
(VIDEO A, VIDEO B, COMPO./(RGB B) and RGB A).  
• You can also select the input by pressing INPUT on the  
Monitor. Each time you press the button, the input  
mode changes in sequence.  
POWER  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
RGB A  
COMPONENT or RGB B  
Ex. When selecting “VIDEO A” input  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Input selected  
Input video signal  
Note:  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
2
4
• To select “COMPONENT” or “RGB B,” you need to set the  
“COMPO./RGB B” setting correctly.  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
DISPLAY  
INPUT SELECT  
4 Adjust the volume.  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
3
VIDEO  
B
:
10  
VOLUME  
+
–
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
Note:  
MUTING  
• While no menu is displayed, you can adjust the volume by  
pressing 2 / 3 on the Monitor.  
To turn off the volume immediately  
Press MUTING.  
“MUTING ON” is displayed, and the sound goes out.  
Pressing the button again resumes the previous volume level.  
MENU/EXIT  
To make the screen indication appear  
Press DISPLAY.  
The types of input and signal are indicated on the screen for  
about 3 seconds.  
You can also make the screen indication appear using menus  
(page 22).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
With this Monitor, you can select among three types of wide  
screens (FULL, ZOOM, and PANORAMIC) in addition to the  
REGULAR screen of conventional 4:3 aspect ratio.  
Press ASPECT to select the screen size.  
Each time you press the button, the screen size changes as  
follows:  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
REGULAR  
FULL  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
REGULAR:  
Displays at conventional 4:3 aspect ratio.  
ASPECT  
INPUT SELECT  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
FULL:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
horizontally.  
MENU/EXIT  
ZOOM:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
vertically and horizontally at the same ratio.  
PANORAMIC:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
horizontally to the extent that the picture  
does not look abnormally.  
Precautions for using the screen mode switching function  
• This Monitor features a screen mode switching (aspect ratio  
change) function. If you select a mode different in aspect  
ratio from software such as TV programs, the picture may  
look different from original picture. Be aware of this point  
when you are selecting a screen mode.  
• If you select a wide screen mode while viewing  
conventional video programs of the aspect ratio 4:3, some  
portions (edges) of the original picture will be cut off, or  
deformed. To enjoy the original picture as it is, select  
“REGULAR” while viewing such programs.  
• If you place the Monitor in a tea room, hotel, etc. for  
business purposes or public viewing and modify the picture  
by using the screen mode switching (aspect ratio change)  
function, this could violate the copyright protected by the  
copyright law, which requires your special attention.  
• If you make the screen very bright and watch programs  
selecting “REGULAR,” for a long period of time, the  
Monitor screen may happen to be burned in. If this occurs,  
watching programs using a wide screen mode for a while  
will reduce the burn-in gradually.  
Notes:  
• When one of the following signals is being input, you  
cannot select the aspect ratio you want.  
I 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can only select FULL.  
I When any signal other than RGB15K-60 and RGB15K-50  
through the RGB A or COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can select only REGULAR and FULL.  
• The aspect ratio can also be changed on the “FUNCTION  
SELECT” Menu (see page 19).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
Adjusting the Picture Quality  
Picture quality can be set for each input mode.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MENU INPUT  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PICTURE ADJ.”  
MENU INPUT  
3 Press 3 to display the Picture  
Adjustment Menu.  
VIDEO  
A
PICTURE ADJ.  
5
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
– 02  
00  
00  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
5 /  
MENU*  
2 / 3  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
item you want to adjust.  
Item  
Adjustment  
range  
Standard  
(Reset)  
CONTRAST  
–20 to +20  
+10  
00  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
BRIGHT (brightness) –20 to +20  
1
*
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
CHROMA  
–20 to +20  
–20 to +20  
–10 to +10  
00  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
2
*
PHASE  
00  
INPUT SELECT  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
00  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
See “To make an adjustment  
while viewing the adjustment  
bar” on the next page.  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
reset  
See “To reset the adjustments” on  
the next page.  
1 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC or PAL signal, or  
component signal.  
*
2 / 3  
5 /  
5
2 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC signal or  
*
component signal.  
MENU/EXIT  
MENU/EXIT  
5 Press 2/3 to make adjustments.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
Adjusting the Screen Size and Position  
bar  
The screen size and position can be adjusted.  
Adjusted settings can be stored for each signal type; therefore,  
when the same signal comes in, the stored settings are  
recalled.  
After step 3 on page 16, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
• When adjusting the size, the size cannot be adjusted  
proportionally, but can be enlarged rightward (or  
downward) only and reduced leftward (or upward) only.  
Therefore, it is necessary to adjust both the size and position  
alternately to adjust to the appropriate size.  
The Sub Menu for CONTRAST appears on the screen.  
:+01  
CONTRAST  
+
–
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
MAIN MENU  
SHARPNESS  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SIZE/POSITION ADJ.”  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 16, proceed as follows:  
MAIN MENU  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
reset  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
3 Press 3 to display the Size/Position  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
Adjustment Menu.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
H
H
V
V
SIZE  
POSITION  
SIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
CLOCK PHASE  
sub menu  
reset  
*
00  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
* Appearing and being adjustable only when you use RGB A or  
RGB B input.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
(Continued)  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
bar  
item you want to adjust.  
After step 3 on page 17, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
The Sub Menu for H SIZE appears on the screen.  
Item  
Adjustment range  
H (horizontal) SIZE*1 –40 to +40  
H POSITION*1  
Varies depending on other  
:+01  
H
SIZE  
settings  
++  
+
+
V (vertical) SIZE*1  
V POSITION*1  
–40 to +40  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
Varies depending on other  
settings  
DOT CLOCK*2  
–10 to +10  
–20 to +20  
H SIZE  
H POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
V SIZE  
CLOCK PHASE*2  
CLOCK PHASE  
V POSITION  
sub menu  
reset  
See “To make an adjustment  
while viewing the adjustment  
bar” on the right column.  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
See “To reset the adjustments” on  
the right column.  
*1 Size and position adjustments are so related that if one  
is adjusted much, the other’s adjustable range will be  
reduced.  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 17, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
*2 DOT CLOCK is the function to adjust the pixel  
sampling number of the A/D converter to the  
resolution (the vertical pixel number) of the input  
signal.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
CLOCK PHASE is the function to adjust the sampling  
timing (phase) to the phase of the input signal.  
You can use the two functions to reduce flickering and  
blurring on the screen when using the RGB A or RGB  
B input.  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
5 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
Note:  
Note:  
• Adjustment values for both horizontal and vertical sizes of  
the screen are so related that if one is adjusted up to near  
the maximum value, the attainable value of the other will  
be decreased.  
• During size and position adjustments, the Monitor  
screen may be distorted. This is normal, but not a  
malfunction of the Monitor.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Color Temperature  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
The adjusted setting applies to all inputs.  
The setting adjusted applies to all inputs.  
• You can change the aspect ratio by pressing ASPECT. (See  
page 15.)  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
MAIN MENU  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
FUNCTION SELECT  
“ * ” appears  
Selection Menu.  
only when you  
have adjusted  
the White  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
FUNCTION SELECT  
B
B
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
Balance (see  
the right  
column).  
B
B
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
1
*
*1 *2 *3  
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
2
3
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
2
3
*
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
*
input is selected.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“COLOR TEMP.”  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“ASPECT.”  
5 Press 2/3 to make an adjustment.  
Each time you press the button, the color temperature  
alternates between “HIGH” and “LOW.”  
5 Press 2/3 to select an aspect ratio you  
want.  
HIGH:  
LOW:  
To make the screen become bluish.  
To make the screen become reddish.  
Each time you press the button, the aspect ratio changes  
as follows:  
REGULAR  
FULL  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
* For detailed information on these aspect ratios, see  
page 15.  
Note:  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
• To make a fine adjustment, adjust “WHITE BALANCE” (see  
page 25).  
Note:  
• When one of the following signals is being input, you  
cannot select the aspect ratio you want.  
I 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
Aspect ratio is fixed to FULL (“ASPECT” does not appear  
on the display).  
I When any signal other than RGB15K-60 and RGB15K-50  
through the RGB A or COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can select only REGULAR and FULL.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
(Continued)  
Setting the Receivable Signal Types  
Setting the COMPONENT/RGB B Input  
You can set the receivable signal types. Normally, select  
“AUTO.”  
A common setting will apply to both the VIDEO A input and  
the VIDEO B input, and a different setting will apply to the  
COMPONENT input.  
After connecting the playback device such as a PC or a DVD  
player to the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals, you have to  
specify which type of signal comes into this terminal—RGB or  
component signals.  
• Without setting “COMPO./RGB B” correctly, you cannot  
show any picture though you select the COMPONENT or  
RGB B input.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
MAIN MENU  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
FUNCTION SELECT  
Selection Menu.  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
B
B
*1 *2 *3  
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
1
*
2
3
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
*
2
3
*
input is selected.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SIGNAL MODE.”  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“COMPO./RGB B”  
5 Press 2/3 to select the receivable video  
signal type.  
Each time you press the button, the receivable video  
signal type changes as follows:  
5 Press 2/3 to select the type of signal.  
• When VIDEO A or VIDEO B input is selected:  
COMPO.: When connecting the playback device such as  
a DVD player, which can emit the component  
signals.  
AUTO  
PAL N  
NTSC  
PAL M  
RGB B: When connecting the playback device such as  
a PC, which can emit the RGB signals.  
• When COMPONENT input is selected:  
The setting changes and the “FUNCTION SELECT”  
Menu disappears.  
AUTO  
480i  
576i  
480p  
576p  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
(1035i)*  
720/50p  
720/60p  
* Changes according to the “HD SIGNAL MODE”  
setting (see page 24).  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Resistance of the RGB B  
Input Terminals  
Resetting the Function Selection Menu Settings  
You can reset all the Function Selection Menu settings at a  
time.  
You can set the resistance of the two of the RGB B input  
terminals to either HIGH (1 kΩ) or LOW (75 Ω):  
• HD/Cs (Horizontal sync/Composite) terminal  
• VD (Vertical sync) terminal.  
HIGH is the normal setting. Change the setting to LOW when  
you use a long connecting cord and the picture flickers and  
blurs on the screen.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
FUNCTION SELECT  
1
*
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
B
B
2
3
*
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*1 *2 *3  
*
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“reset.”  
2
3
*
*
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
5 Press 3.  
input is selected.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SYNC TERM.”  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
5 Press 2/3 to select the terminal  
resistance.  
6 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
Each time you press the button, the resistance alternates  
between “HIGH” and “LOW.”  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
HIGH:  
LOW:  
Initial setting. Normally select this.  
When using a long connecting cord and the  
picture flickering and blurring on the screen.  
7 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
Showing On-screen Display  
The input mode and signal type will be indicated on the  
screen.  
• You can also show these information by pressing DISPLAY  
on the remote control. (See page 14.)  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MENU INPUT  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MENU INPUT  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“STATUS DISPLAY.”  
3 Press 3 to display the current input  
5
5 /  
MENU*  
2 / 3  
terminal and received signal type.  
Ex. When selecting “VIDEO A” or “VIDEO B” input  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
Input selected  
Input Video signal  
type  
Ex. When selecting “COMPONENT” input  
COMPONENT  
480i  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Ex. When selecting “RGB A” or “RGB B” input  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
RGB  
B
(BNC)  
60.3Hz*  
37.9kHz  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
When the signal being input is a preset video  
mode, an “*” will be shown after the  
frequency.  
INPUT SELECT  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
Note:  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
• If you want to make these information appear automatically  
when you change the input mode, see “Showing the  
On-screen When Changing the Input Mode” on page 23.  
VOLUME –  
2 / 3  
5 /  
5
MENU/EXIT  
MENU/EXIT  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Showing the On-screen When Changing  
the Input Mode  
Prohibiting the Monitor’s Button Operations  
This function allows you to prohibit the button operations on  
the Monitor to prevent malfunction or avoid tampering.  
With this function, you can see the selected input mode and  
signal type when changing the input mode.  
1 On the remote control:  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“CONTROL LOCK.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“STATUS DISPLAY.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Control Lock  
function alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Status Display  
function alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
To cancel the Control Lock function, select “OFF.”  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
To cancel the Status Display function, select “OFF.”  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
Note:  
• Even when the Control Lock function is in use, the  
following operations are possible:  
– Operation to cancel the Control Lock function  
– All operations from the remote control  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
Setting the Remote-Controllable Input  
Setting the High-Definition Signal Types  
When connecting the external control unit to the REMOTE  
MAKE terminal, you need to set the desired input to use,  
which you can select from the connected external control unit.  
You can select one of the High-Definition (HD) signal types  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals — 1080i or  
1035i. Normally set it to “1080i.”  
• Without setting “COMPO./RGB B” correctly, you cannot  
show any picture though you select the COMPONENT  
input (see page 20).  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
“REMOTE SWITCH.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“HD SIGNAL MODE.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Remote Switch  
Mode changes as follows:  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the HD signal type  
alternates between “1080i” and “1035i.”  
MODE1: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“VIDEO B” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
• You can select either “1080i” and “1035i” according to  
the HD signal you input — whichever gives you  
proportionally shaped pictures.  
MODE2: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“COMPONENT/RGB B” when controlled  
from the external control unit.  
MODE3: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“RGB A” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
MODE4: Input alternates between “VIDEO B” and  
“COMPONENT/RGB B” when controlled  
from the external control unit.  
MODE5: Input alternates between “VIDEO B” and  
“RGB A” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
MODE6: Input alternates between “COMPONENT/  
RGB B” and “RGB A” when controlled from  
the external control unit.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan  
Adjusting the White Balance  
Set the speed of the internal cooling fan to “HIGH” when  
installing the Monitor vertically, so that the internal heat of  
the Monitor is released more effectively.  
G GAIN, B GAIN and R GAIN can be finely adjusted  
separately for “HIGH” and “LOW” settings of the color  
temperature.  
Note:  
1 On the remote control:  
• When installing the Monitor vertically, it is also required to  
attach the external cooling fan unit. (See page 13.)  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“WHITE BALANCE.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
3 Press 3 to display the White Balance  
“FAN SPEED.”  
Adjustment Menu.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
WHITE BALANCE:HIGH  
R
G
B
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
:
:
:
000  
001  
002  
+
–
sub menu  
reset  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the speed of the internal  
cooling fan changes as follows:  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
LOW:  
Initial setting. Normally select this.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
HIGH:  
Select this when installing the Monitor  
vertically.  
item you want to adjust.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
5 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the other  
items.  
7 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
Notes:  
• Adjustable range will vary among the Monitors.  
• “MAX” may appear soon after you begin adjustment. This  
is normal but not a malfunction.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
bars  
After step 3 on page 25, proceed as follows:  
Setting the Clock and the Power On/Off Timer  
You can turn the Monitor on and off automatically with the  
Power On/Off timer.  
• Since you cannot use the timer functions without setting  
the clock, set the clock at first.  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
The Sub Menu for R GAIN appears on the screen.  
• Setting the Clock  
You can also adjust the clock with the following procedure.  
:
000  
+
R
GAIN  
–
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
R GAIN  
G GAIN  
On the Monitor:  
B GAIN  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 25, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
The confirmation screen appears.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“TIMER,” then press 3 to display the  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
Timer Menu.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
Before the clock setting  
After the clock setting  
TIMER  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
:
:
:
:
:
– –:– –  
OFF  
– – :– –  
OFF  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
P
OWER-ON TIME  
P
OWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
21:20  
– – :– –  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PRESENT TIME,” then press 3.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“HOURS,” then press 2/3 repeatedly to  
adjust the hour (24 hour clock).  
5 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“MINUTES,” then press 2/3 repeatedly  
to adjust the minute.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) three times to exit from the  
menu operations.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Using the Power On/Off Timer  
Select the item you want to set in step 3 in “Setting the  
Clock” (page 26) and follow the instructions below.  
About the Timer Battery  
The timer clock works on the battery embedded in the  
Monitor.  
If the battery becomes weak or has already run out, a message  
appears on the TIMER, COLOR-REVERSE, and REFRESH  
menus.  
POWER-ON SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Power-On Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The Monitor automatically turns on at the time  
set in “POWER-ON TIME.”  
When the battery becomes weak (BATTERY LOW)  
“BATTERY LOW” appears on the screen.  
OFF: The Power-On Timer is deactivated.  
TIMER  
POWER-ON TIME  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
POWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
You can adjust the time to turn on the Monitor.  
Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in “Setting  
the Clock” (page 26).  
21:20  
BATTERY LOW  
SELECT: EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
POWER-OFF SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Power-Off Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The Monitor automatically turns off at the time  
set in “POWER-OFF TIME.”  
When the battery has run out (BATTERY EMPTY)  
“BATTERY EMPTY” appears on the screen.  
OFF: The Power-Off Timer is deactivated.  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
POWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
– – :––  
OFF  
– – :– –  
OFF  
POWER-OFF TIME  
– – :– –  
You can adjust the time to turn off the Monitor.  
Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in “Setting  
the Clock” (page 26).  
BATTERY EMPTY  
SELECT: EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
To reset the timer setting  
The clock is reset and “PRESENT TIME” is shown as “-- : --.”  
• You cannot replace the battery yourself. Please consult your  
dealer to replace it.  
• Set the clock and the timer functions (Power On/Off Timer,  
Color-Reverse On/Off Timer, and Refresh On/Off Timer)  
again after replacing the battery.  
After step 2 on page 26, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
• You can use functions other than the timer functions  
without replacing the battery.  
key.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
Using the Pixel Shift Function  
“POWER SAVE” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
This function periodically shift the position (pixels) of the  
displayed picture on the screen so that you can avoid the  
screen from being burned in.  
1 On the remote control:  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
:
123  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
U
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
SAVE1: The screen gets dim.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SAVE2: The screen gets dimmer.  
OFF: The Power Save function is deactivate.  
To cancel the Power Save function, select “OFF.”  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PIXEL SHIFT” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
Reducing the Afterimage Effect  
If the same image (pattern) is continuously displayed on the  
screen for a long time, the area on the screen corresponding to  
the image may vary in brightness, leaving an afterimage on  
the screen.  
You can reduce the afterimage by reversing the color of the  
image on the screen.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
U
CATEGORY  
.
You can activate/deactivate the function with the Color-  
Reverse On/Off Timer.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Pixel Shift function  
alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
• Display the image which has been caused the afterimage on  
the screen before starting the following procedure.  
To cancel the Pixel Shift function, select “OFF.”  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Using the Power Save Function  
You can use this function to reduce the electrical consumption  
and to extend the lifetime of the Monitor’s screen.  
• The brightness of the screen will be reduced.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
1 On the remote control:  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To reset the Color-Reverse setting  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“COLOR-REVERSE” (on the second  
After step 2 on the left column, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
page), then press 3.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
U
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Notes:  
• The Color-Reverse function requires considerable time to  
reduce the afterimage. Deactivate the function temporarily  
at intervals of 30 minutes-1 hour and check the screen if the  
afterimage still remains or not. Set the function to off if the  
afterimage has been reduced.  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the item you want  
to set and set the item as follows.  
COLOR-REVERSE  
You can activate/deactivate the function manually.  
Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Refreshing the Screen  
After the power is turned off, a whitish image may be left on  
the screen. In that case, leave the monitor in a white back state  
for a while, and the image will disappear.  
You can activate/deactivate the function with the Refresh  
On/Off Timer.  
ON:  
The function is activated immediately after  
exiting the menu operations.  
OFF: The function is deactivated.  
TIMER: Select this when you use the Color-Reverse  
On/Off Timer.  
Note:  
• Set the clock (see page 26) and select “TIMER,” before  
using the Color-Reverse On/Off Timer.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
START SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Color-Reverse On Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically activated at the  
time set in “START TIME.”  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
OFF: The Color-Reverse On Timer is deactivated.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
START TIME  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
You can adjust the time to activate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
END SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Color-Reverse Off Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically deactivated at the  
time set in “END TIME.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“REFRESH” (on the second page) then  
press 3.  
OFF: The Color-Reverse Off Timer is deactivated.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
END TIME  
You can adjust the time to deactivate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
:
123  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) repeatedly to exit from the  
menu operations.  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
U
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
(To be continued on the next page)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
Notes:  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the item you want  
• The Refresh function requires considerable time to reduce  
the afterimage. Deactivate the function temporarily at  
intervals of 30 minutes-1 hour and check the screen if the  
afterimage still remains or not. Set the function to off if the  
afterimage has been reduced.  
to set and set the item as follows.  
REFRESH  
You can activate/deactivate the function manually.  
• Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
ON:  
The function is activated immediately after  
exiting the menu operations.  
Notes on the Color-Reverse/Refresh Timer  
OFF:  
The function is deactivated.  
• Once you set the Color-Reverse/Refresh timer, the timer  
function is still activated even if you turn off the power.  
If you turn on the power after the “START TIME” you  
set, Color-Reverse/Refresh function is activated.  
To cancel the function, select “OFF” in the menu  
(see pages 29 and 30).  
TIMER: Select this when you use the Refresh On/Off  
Timer.  
Note:  
• Set the clock (see page 26) and select “TIMER,” before  
using the Refresh On/Off Timer.  
START SET  
• The Color-Reverse timer is deactivated when you turn  
on or off the Color-Reverse function manually.  
The Refresh timer works in the same way as mentioned  
above.  
Select “TIMER” in the menu to control the functions  
automatically (see pages 29 and 30).  
You can activate/deactivate the Refresh On Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically activated at the  
time set in “START TIME.”  
OFF: The Refresh On Timer is deactivated.  
START TIME  
You can adjust the time to activate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
Resetting All the Setup Menu Settings  
You can reset all the following Setup Menu settings at a time,  
except the use time (HOUR METER).  
END SET  
1 On the remote control:  
You can activate/deactivate the Refresh Off Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically deactivated at the  
time set in “END TIME.”  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
OFF: The Refresh Off Timer is deactivated.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
END TIME  
You can adjust the time to deactivate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 on  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) repeatedly to exit from the  
menu operations.  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To reset the Reflesh function setting  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
After step 2 above, proceed as follows:  
“reset” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
key.  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
U
.
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press 3.  
4 Press 3 again to reset all the Menu  
The confirmation screen appears.  
settings and adjustments.  
The power is turned off, then turned on again  
automatically.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
Confirming the Use Time and Model Information  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
You can confirm the hours of use and the model information  
on the Setup Menu.  
This may be necessary when you ask for any service.  
4 Press 3 again to reset all the Setup  
Menu settings.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
5 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Resetting All the Menu Settings  
You can reset all the Menu settings and adjustments at a time,  
except the use time (HOUR METER).  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
1 On the remote control:  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
2 Keep pressing 5/∞ until the second  
page of the Setup Menu appears.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
Hours of use  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
:
123  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
U
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Model  
Information  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “all  
reset” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Confirm the hour of use and model  
information.  
• The displayed value for the hours of use is divided by  
100. To calculate the actual hours of use, multiply the  
displayed value by 100.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
U
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Notes:  
3 Press 3.  
• The value for the hours of use is added by one hour unit. If  
you use the monitor within one hour, it will not be added to  
the hours of use.  
• The period when the monitor is on standby (the power  
lamp glows orange) will not be added to the hours of use.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
all reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Classifications  
Main Menu  
Picture Adjustment Menu  
:+01  
CONTRAST  
+
VIDEO  
A
–
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
PICTURE ADJ.  
:+01  
BRIGHT  
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
+
–
:+01  
CHROMA  
+
–
:+01  
PHASE  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
+
–
:+01  
SHARPNESS  
+
–
*1 *2  
*1 *2  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
then  
key.  
key.  
Size/Position Adjustment Menu  
:+01  
H
SIZE  
++  
+
+
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
H
H
V
V
SIZE  
POSITION  
SIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
00  
:+01  
H
POSITION  
SIZE  
++  
+ +  
POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
CLOCK PHASE  
sub menu  
reset  
:+01  
:+01  
V
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
V
POSITION  
:+01  
DOT CLOCK  
+
–
3
3
*
*
:+01  
CLOCK PHASE  
+
–
reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
"YES"  
key.  
"NO" then MENU  
key.  
Function Selection Menu  
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
B
B
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
then  
key.  
key.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
5
4
6
*
*
*
Status Display  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
Input currently selected  
Input video signal  
Ex. When “VIDEO A” input is selected.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE ADJ. (Picture adjustment): See page 16.  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
Adjusts the contrast of the picture.  
Adjusts the brightness of the picture.  
Adjusts the color density of the picture.  
Adjusts the color phase.  
CHROMA*1  
PHASE*2  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
Adjusts the outlines of the picture.  
Displays the fine adjustment bar.  
Resets the Picture Adjustment Menu settings to defaults.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ. : See page 17.  
H SIZE  
Adjusts the horizontal screen size.  
H POSITION  
Adjusts the horizontal screen position.  
V SIZE  
Adjusts the vertical screen size.  
V POSITION  
DOT CLOCK*3  
Adjusts the vertical screen position.  
Adjusts to eliminate stripes or flickering. Use with “CLOCK PHASE.”  
Normally, no adjustment is needed.  
Adjusts to eliminate stripes or flickering. Use with “DOT CLOCK.”  
Normally, no adjustment is needed.  
CLOCK PHASE*3  
sub menu  
reset  
Displays the fine adjustment bar.  
Resets Size/position Adjustment Menu settings to defaults.  
FUNCTION SELECT: See pages 19 to 21.  
COLOR TEMP.  
Adjusts the color temperature.  
Use when the picture is reddish or bluish.  
Selects the horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen.  
• Selects a color system (NTSC, PAL M, PAL N) when VIDEO A or VIDEO B input is selected.  
ASPECT*4  
SIGNAL MODE*5  
Normally, set to “AUTO.”  
• Selects a scan system—480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035i), 1080/50i—  
when COMPONENT input is selected. Normally, set to “AUTO.”  
Selects the usage of the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals either as the COMPONENT input  
terminal or as the RGB B input terminal.  
Adjusts the resistance of RGB B input terminals.  
Resets the Function Selection Menu settings to defaults.  
COMPO./RGB B  
SYNC TERM.*6  
reset  
STATUS DISPLAY: See page 22.  
Shows the input mode and signal type on the screen.  
*1 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC or PAL signal, or component signal.  
*2 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC signal or component signal.  
*3 Adjustable when RGB A or RGB B input is selected.  
*4 Not adjustable when viewing the following component signals—720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), and 1080/50i. ( In  
such a case, “ASPECT” does not appear on the display.)  
*5 Adjustable when VIDEO A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
*6 Adjustable when RGB B input is selected.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Classifications  
(Continued)  
Setup Menu  
White Balance Adjustment Menu  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
:
000  
+
R
GAIN  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
–
WHITE BALANCE:HIGH  
R
G
B
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
:
:
:
000  
001  
002  
:+001  
+
G
GAIN  
+
–
–
sub menu  
reset  
:–002  
B
GAIN  
+
–
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
key.  
key.  
Reset Confirmation Screen  
Timer Menu  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
OWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
HOURS  
:
:
:
14:25  
14  
25  
P
MINUTES  
21:20  
TIMER  
POWER-ON TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
08:26  
08  
26  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
TIMER  
POWER-OFF TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
21:20  
21  
20  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
Color-Reverse Menu  
SET-UP MENU  
2/2  
COLOR-REVERSE  
PIXEL SHIFT  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
COLOR-REVERSE  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ON  
08:06  
ON  
21:47  
COLOR-REVERSE  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
START SET  
START TIME  
END SET  
END TIME  
reset  
START TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
08:06  
08  
06  
HOUR METER x100h  
:
123  
MODEL  
:GM-X50  
Ver.  
.
A
U
COLOR-REVERSE  
CATEGORY  
END TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
21:47  
21  
47  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
Refresh Menu  
REFRESH  
REFRESH  
START SET  
START TIME  
END SET  
END TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ON  
12:10  
ON  
REFRESH  
START TIME  
HOURS  
:
:
:
12:10  
12  
10  
MINUTES  
14:24  
REFRESH  
END TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
14:24  
14  
24  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
all reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
then  
"YES"  
"NO"  
key.  
key.  
MENU  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATUS DISPLAY: See page 23.  
Sets if you want the input terminal and the type of signal to be indicated on the screen just after inputs are switched.  
CONTROL LOCK: See page 23.  
Sets the Monitor so that it cannot be operated with the buttons on itself.  
REMOTE SWITCH: See page 24.  
Set the selectable input terminals when controlling the Monitor with the external control unit.  
HD SIGNAL MODE: See page 24.  
Select the High-Definition (HD) signal type.  
FAN SPEED: See page 25.  
Sets the speed of the internal cooling fan.  
WHITE BALANCE: See page 25.  
Adjusts R GAIN, G GAIN and B GAIN finely each for “HIGH” and “LOW” settings of the color temperature.  
TIMER: See pages 26 and 27.  
Sets the clock and the Power On/Off Timer.  
PIXEL SHIFT: See page 28.  
Sets a screen saver.  
POWER SAVE: See page 28.  
Sets the power save function.  
COLOR-REVERSE: See page 28.  
Use to reduce the afterimage on the screen of the still picture by reversing the color.  
REFRESH: See page 29.  
Use to reduce the whitish image remaining on the screen after turning off the power.  
reset: See page 30.  
Resets the Setup Menu settings to defaults.  
all reset: See page 31.  
Resets the all menu settings and adjustments to defaults.  
HOUR METER x 100h: See page 31.  
Use to confirm the hours of use.  
MODEL: See page 31.  
Use to confirm the model information of the Monitor.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Solutions to common problems related to the Monitor are described here. If none of the solutions presented here solves the  
problem, unplug the Monitor and consult an authorized dealer or service center.  
Symptom  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
•Insert the power cord (plug) firmly.  
•Turn on the POWER switch.  
Page  
12  
Power is not supplied. • Is the power cord disconnected?  
•Is the POWER switch turned on?  
14  
Power is suddenly  
turned on or off.  
•Is the Power On/Off Timer activated? •Set the timer to “OFF” on the menu.  
26  
14  
Video image does not •Is the correct input selected?  
appear, or audio  
sound does not occur.  
•Select the correct input by pressing  
INPUT SELECT (VIDEO A, VIDEO B,  
COMPO./(RGB B) or RGB A) on the  
remote control (or INPUT on the  
Monitor).  
•Are the devices connected correctly?  
•Connect the devices correctly.  
•Set the devices correctly.  
•Set it correctly.  
11, 12  
•Are signals being supplied from the  
connected devices?  
—
•Is “COMPO./RGB B” set correctly if  
using the COMPONENT/RGB B  
terminals?  
20  
10  
•Are input signals (scanning frequency, •Check if the signal is appropriate  
etc.) appropriate?  
(scanning frequency, etc.), and input  
the appropriate signal.  
•Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
•Is volume set at minimum?  
•Adjust brightness on the menu.  
•Adjust volume.  
16  
14  
•Are the diagnostic lamps turned on?  
•Refer to “Self-diagnostic Indication,”  
and take an appropriate action.  
37  
The picture becomes •Is the signal RGB input?  
blurred.  
•Adjust DOT CLOCK and CLOCK  
PHASE using the menu.  
17  
•Is the RGB B connecting cord long?  
•Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
•Set the SYNC TERM. “LOW.”  
21  
16  
Color is abnormally  
dark or bright.  
•Adjust BRIGHT (brightness) using the  
menu.  
•Is picture quality (color density, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
•Adjust picture using the menu.  
16  
37  
20  
“TEMP. OVER” lights (or flashes) at the •Refer to “Self-diagnostic Indication,”  
right bottom of the screen.  
and take an appropriate action.  
Color is poor or  
unstable.  
•Is the correct broadcast system (color  
system) selected?  
•Set SIGNAL MODE (color system) to  
“AUTO.”  
•Are signals (scanning frequency, etc.) to •Check if the signal is appropriate  
connected devices appropriate?  
(scanning frequency, etc.), and input  
the appropriate signal.  
10  
29, 30  
17  
Color is suddenly  
reversed or whitened.  
•Is the Color-Reverse/Refresh timer  
activated?  
•Set “COLOR-REVERSE”/“REFRESH”  
to “OFF” on the menu.  
The picture is cut or  
shifted toward one  
side.  
•Is the size or position of the screen  
adjusted properly?  
•Adjust H SIZE, V SIZE, H POSITION  
or V POSITION using the menu.  
The remote control  
does not work.  
•Are the batteries correctly set?  
•Are the batteries exhausted?  
•Insert batteries correctly, observing the  
polarities (ª and ·).  
8
8
•Replace with new batteries.  
•Remove any blocking object.  
•Is there any object blocking the path  
between the remote control and remote  
sensor?  
—
•Is the Monitor too far away from you? •Move toward the Monitor, then operate  
—
the remote control.  
The buttons on the  
Monitor do not work.  
•Is the Control Lock function in use?  
•Set the Control Lock function to “OFF”  
using the menu.  
23  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the trouble still persists, follow the procedure below:  
Self-diagnostic Indication  
When something abnormal occurs with the Monitor, this  
function informs you of the condition of the Monitor with  
self-diagnostic lamps, allowing for smooth service work.  
1 Check which lamps are lighting or flashing.  
On the Self-diagnostic Report Sheet (below), check the box  
next to “Lights” or “Flashes” of the corresponding lamp or  
lamps.  
Remote sensor  
•
Only one lamp may light or flash, or all three lamps  
may do so.  
1
2
3
2 Switch off the POWER switch on the back of the  
Monitor.  
Power lamp  
Self-diagnostic lamps (1 to 3)  
M
E
N
U
I
N
P
U
T
3 Unplug the power cord.  
4 Call your dealer and tell which lamps are lighting  
or flashing. (Copy and fax the Self-diagnostic  
Report Sheet below.)  
❑If the screen monitor turns off and self-diagnostic  
lamps light or flash  
If the self-diagnostic lamps light or flash in red, check the  
following before consulting the dealer where you  
purchased the Monitor.  
Note:  
If you switch on the main power immediately after switching  
it off (or after recovering from a brief power interruption), the  
self-diagnostic lamps may light (or flash), and no image may  
appear on the screen. In this case, switch off the main power  
again, wait for about 10 seconds, then switch it on again. If no  
self-diagnostic lamps light or flash, you can operate and use  
the Monitor as usual.  
• If self-diagnostic lamp 1 (upper) flashes, lamp 2 (middle)  
lights, and lamp 3 (lower) flashes  
This may be caused by the dusty intakes on the rear. If  
this happens, switch off the main power by POWER  
switch (set to “‡ (off)”), unplug the AC power cord,  
then clean the intakes by referring to the instruction on  
page 2.  
– After cleaning, switch on the Monitor’s main power  
again. If self-diagnostic lamps do not go off, consult  
your dealer immediately.  
Self-diagnostic Report Sheet  
❑If the screen monitor dims a little and “TEMP. OVER”  
lights (or flashes)  
If “TEMP. OVER” lights or flashes at the right bottom of the  
screen, check the following before consulting the dealer  
where you purchased the Monitor.  
Store name where you purchased the Monitor  
To  
Model Name:  
“TEMP. OVER” appears to warn you of the internal heat  
buildup, which is usually caused by accumulated dust  
around the intakes or by improper installation. If the cause  
of the internal heat buildup is eliminated, this indication  
disappears and the screen recovers the brightness.  
• If “TEMP. OVER” flashes in yellow  
Plasma Display Monitor  
GM-X50U  
The self-diagnostic lamps light or flash as listed on the  
following table. Please give me immediate advice or service if  
necessary.  
This may be caused by the dusty intakes on the rear. If  
this happens, switch off the main power by POWER  
switch (set to “‡ (off)”), unplug the AC power cord,  
then clean the intakes by referring to the instruction on  
page 2.  
Self-diagnostic lamps  
NO. Lamp position  
Conditions  
– After cleaning, switch on the Monitor’s main power  
again. If “TEMP. OVER” still flashes, this trouble may  
be caused by improper installation or improper  
location of the Monitor. In this case, consult your  
dealer immediately to solve this improper  
1
2
3
Upper  
Middle  
Lower  
& Lights  
& Flashes  
& Flashes  
& Lights  
& Lights  
& Flashes  
& Flashes  
installation and to improve the circumstances around  
the Monitor.  
• If “TEMP. OVER” lights in red  
TEMP. OVER  
& Lights  
“TEMP. OVER” will be shown for abut two minutes, the  
Monitor will shut off automatically, then the Self-  
diagonal lamps light in red. If this happens, switch off  
the main power by POWER switch (set to “‡ (off)”),  
unplug the AC power cord, then consult your dealer  
immediately.  
Your Name:  
Telephone No.:  
Address:  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Model name  
GM-X50U  
Frame color  
Silver  
Screen size  
Type 50 wide format  
Aspect ratio  
16:9 (Wide format)  
Number of pixels displayed  
Number of colors displayed  
1366 (H) x 768 (V)  
16.77 million (256 colors for each of RGB)  
110.7 cm x 62.2 cm (43 9/16” x 24 7/16”), 127 cm (50”)  
Effective screen size  
(W x H, Diagonally)  
Weight  
50 kg (110 lbs.)  
External dimensions  
(W x H x D)  
123.2 cm x 74.3 cm x 10.3 cm (48 5/8” x 29 3/8” x 4 1/8”)  
* Excluding protruding parts  
Power requirements  
Rated input current  
AC 120 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
4.0 A  
Compatible systems  
VIDEO A, VIDEO B input  
NTSC, PAL M, PAL N  
COMPONENT input  
Audio power output  
480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), 1080/50i  
SPEAKER OUT: 6 Ω to 8 Ω  
3 W + 3 W (TYP at impedance 6 Ω)  
Operating conditions  
Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C  
Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % (non-condensation)  
(Slightly variable depending on ambient conditions for installation.)  
VIDEO A  
Video input  
BNC terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
BNC terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Video output  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
VIDEO B  
Y/C input  
Y/C terminal x 1  
Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
C: 0.286 V(p-p), 75 Ω (for NTSC)  
C: 0.3 V(p-p), 75 Ω (for PAL)  
Video input  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
COMPONENT/RGB B *  
COMPONENT input  
BNC terminal x 3  
Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
PB/B-Y: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
PR/R-Y: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
B: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
RGB input  
BNC terminal x 5  
Analog RGB:  
R: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G on sync: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω (negative sync)  
Horizontal sync/Composite sync (HD/Cs):  
HD: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Cs: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Vertical sync (VD):  
VD: 1 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R) 500 mV(rms), high impedance  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RGB A  
RGB input  
D-sub 3-row 15-pin terminal x 1,  
Video signal: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G on sync: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω (negative sync)  
Horizontal sync/Composite sync (HD/Cs):  
HD: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Cs: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Vertical sync (VD):  
VD: 1 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Audio input  
Stereo mini jack terminal x 1  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
REMOTE terminals  
RS-232C: D-sub 9-pin terminal x 1  
MAKE: Mini DIN 4 pin  
WIRED: Stereo mini jack terminal x 1  
OPTION terminal  
Used exclusively for JVC's optional parts  
AUDIO OUT terminals  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
Output impedance 600 Ω  
SPEAKER OUT (L/R) terminals  
Impedance 6 Ω to 8 Ω  
* To use the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals either as the COMPONENT input terminal or as the RGB B input terminal, you  
need to set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly (see page 20).  
• For easy understanding, pictures and illustrations are shown by being emphasized, omitted or composed, and may be more or  
less different from actual products.  
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Macintosh is registered  
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only, and may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
Options (not supplied)  
Stand Unit  
TS-CL01SG, TS-CL02SG  
Wall Mounting Unit  
Ceiling Suspension Unit  
Cooling Fan Unit  
Speaker Unit  
TS-C420P2W, TS-C420P6W, TS-C420P8W, TS-C420P9W  
TS-C420P3W  
TS-C01FANG  
TS-C500SPG  
• Consult your dealer to see if other options are available.  
Notice on transportation  
This Monitor is precision equipment and needs dedicated packing material for transportation.  
Never use any packing material supplied from other than JVC or JVC-authorized dealers.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
(Continued)  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals)  
• RS-232C terminal  
This is a female type connector.  
• Y/C terminal  
4
3
5
2
1
Pin number Signal name  
Pin number Signal name  
4
2
3
1
Pin number Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
DCD  
RD  
6
7
8
9
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
1
2
3
4
GND (Y)  
GND (C)  
TD  
Y
C
DTR  
GND  
8
6
9
7
• MAKE terminal  
• RGB Input Terminal  
6
Pin number Signal name  
Pin number Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Red  
Green  
Blue  
9
10  
N/C  
GND  
GND  
N/C  
7
6
4
2
5
3
1
Pin number Signal name  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
GND  
1
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
8
N/C  
12  
SW2  
3
4
5
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
13  
HD/Cs  
VD  
SW1  
14  
SW DET  
GND  
15  
9
10  
15  
N/C  
External  
GND  
Dimensions  
Top view  
Side view  
Front view  
1232 (48 5/8)  
1125 (44 3/8)  
1107 (43 9/16)  
103 (4 1/8)  
35.5 (1 1/2)  
MENU INPUT  
1.5  
(1/16)  
Unit: mm (inch)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Printed in Japan  
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0204MKH-MW-VP  
PLASMA DISPLAY MONITOR  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG : PLASMABILDSCHIRM  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS : MONITEUR DE VISUALISATION PLASMA  
MANUALE D’ISTRUZIONI : MONITOR CON SCHERMO AL PLASMA  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES : MONITOR DISPLAY DE PLASMA  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GM-X50E  
MENU INPUT  
LCT1602-001A-U  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
Model  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC Monitor.  
Before using the monitor, read this manual carefully so  
that you know how to use the Monitor correctly.  
Refer to this manual whenever questions or problems  
about operation arise. Be sure to read and observe the  
safety precautions.  
GM-X50E  
Keep this manual where the user can see it easily.  
* Installation and removal require special expertise.  
Consult your product dealer for details.  
Contents  
Page  
Other Convenient Functions ................................... 22  
• Showing On-screen Display .............................. 22  
• Showing the On-screen When Changing  
the Input Mode .................................................. 23  
• Prohibiting the Monitor’s Button Operations...... 23  
• Setting the Remote-Controllable Input .............. 24  
• Setting the High-Definition Signal Types ........... 24  
• Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan .. 25  
• Adjusting the White Balance ............................. 25  
• Setting the Clock and the Power On/Off  
Timer ................................................................. 26  
• Using the Pixel Shift Function ........................... 28  
• Using the Power Save Function ........................ 28  
• Preventing the Afterimage Effect ...................... 28  
• Refreshing the Screen ...................................... 29  
• Resetting All the Setup Menu Settings ............. 30  
• Resetting All the Menu Settings ........................ 31  
• Confirming the Use Time and Model Information ... 31  
Page  
Safety Precautions .................................................... 2  
Parts Identification .................................................... 4  
• Monitor: Front View ............................................. 4  
• Monitor: Rear Views 1........................................ 5  
• Monitor: Rear Views 2........................................ 6  
• Remote Control ................................................... 7  
Preparations.............................................................. 8  
• Checking the Accessories................................... 8  
• Installing the Batteries......................................... 8  
• About the Supplied Ferrite Core ......................... 8  
Installation ................................................................. 9  
• Precautions ......................................................... 9  
Connections ............................................................ 10  
• Precautions ....................................................... 10  
• Available Signals ............................................... 10  
• Connection Diagrams ....................................... 11  
• Connecting an External Control Unit................. 12  
• External Speaker Connection ........................... 13  
• Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit ........ 13  
Menu Classifications ............................................... 32  
• Main Menu ........................................................ 32  
• Setup Menu....................................................... 34  
Basic Operations..................................................... 14  
• Daily Operations ............................................... 14  
• Changing the Aspect Ratio ............................... 15  
Troubleshooting ....................................................... 36  
• Self-diagnostic Indication .................................. 37  
Video Adjustments .................................................. 16  
• Adjusting the Picture Quality ............................. 16  
• Adjusting the Screen Size and Position ............ 17  
• Adjusting the Color Temperature....................... 19  
• Changing the Aspect Ratio ............................... 19  
• Setting the Receivable Signal Types ................. 20  
• Setting the COMPONENT/RGB B Input ........... 20  
• Changing the Resistance of the RGB B Input  
Terminals........................................................... 21  
• Resetting the Function Selection Menu Settings .... 21  
Specifications .......................................................... 38  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
EUROPE EMC STANDARD NOTICE  
Warning: This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the  
user may be required to take adequate measure.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION  
WARNING:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO  
OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE  
APPARATUS.  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This unit has been engineered and manufactured to assure  
your personal safety. But IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE  
HAZARD. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated into this product, observe the following basic rules for  
its installation, use and service. Please read these “Important Safeguards” carefully before use.  
– All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.  
– The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.  
– All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.  
– All operating instructions should be followed.  
– Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp  
cloth for cleaning.  
– Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust around the intakes (all the  
openings) on the rear. If a vacuum is not available, use a cloth and wipe it off.  
Failure to do so will cause internal heat buildup and, therefore, cause damage  
to the product.  
– Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as  
they may be hazardous.  
– Do not use this product near water. Do not use immediately after moving from  
a low temperature to high temperature, as this causes condensation, which  
may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
– Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or  
adult, and serious damage to the product. The product should be mounted according to the manufacturer’s instructions,  
and should use a mount recommended by the manufacturer.  
– When the product is used on a cart, care should be taken to avoid quick stops, excessive force, and  
uneven surfaces which may cause the product and cart to overturn, damaging equipment or causing  
possible injury to the operator.  
– Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. These ensure reliable operation of the  
product and protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. (The openings  
should never be blocked by placing the product on bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface. It should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided and the manufacturer’s instructions have  
been adhered to.)  
For proper ventilation, separate the product from other equipment, which may prevent ventilation and keep distance  
more than 10 cm.  
– This product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the  
type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– For United Kingdom: This product is equipped with a three-wire plug. This plug will fit only into a grounded power outlet.  
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the grounded plug.  
– Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or  
against them.Pay particular attention to cords at doors, plugs, receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.  
– For added protection of this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods  
of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power line surges.  
– Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or convenience receptacles on other equipment as this can result in a  
risk of fire or electric shock.  
– Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short  
out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
– Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages  
and other hazards. Refer all service to qualified service personnel.  
– Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer service to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:  
a)When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b)If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen on the product.  
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d)If the product operated normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered  
by the Operation Manual, as an improper adjustment of controls may result in damage and will often require  
extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
e)If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this indicates a need for service.  
– When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the  
manufacturer or with same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric  
shock, or other hazards.  
– Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper operating condition.  
– The product should be placed more than 30 cm away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, and  
other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
– When connecting other products such as VCR’s, and personal computers, you should turn off the power of this product  
for protection against electric shock.  
– Do not place combustibles behind the cooling fan. For example, cloth, paper, matches, aerosol cans or gas lighters that  
present special hazards when over heated.  
– Use only the accessory cord designed for this product to prevent shock.  
–
Option terminal: This terminal is intended exclusively to be used to drive the fan motor.  
Do not connect any plugs to the terminal other than JVC’s recommended optional parts.  
Polarity of terminal  
POWER CONNECTION  
The power supply voltage rating of this product is AC 220 – 240 V.  
The power cords attached conform to the following power supply  
voltage and countries. Use only the power cord designated to ensure  
Safety and EMC regulations of each country.  
For European countries:  
AC 220 – 240 V  
For United Kingdom:  
AC 220 – 240 V  
Note for the United Kingdom power cord only  
The plug on the United Kingdom power cord has a built-in fuse.  
When replacing the fuse, be sure to use only a correctly rated  
approved type, re-fit the fuse cover. (Consult your dealer or  
qualified service personnel.)  
How to replace the fuse  
Open the fuse  
compartment with the  
blade screw driver, and  
replace the fuse.  
Fuse  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts Identification  
Monitor: Front View  
1
2
MENU INPUT  
MENU INPUT  
Bottom View  
3
4
5
6
1 Remote sensor/power lamp  
5 INPUT button (page 14)  
Point the front end of the wireless remote control toward  
here.  
When the Monitor is turned on, the power lamp glows  
green. It glows orange in standby mode.  
Use this button to switch between inputs.  
To select the COMPONENT or RGB B input, you have to  
set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly on the menu (see page  
20).  
2 Self-diagnostic lamps (page 37)  
These lamps light/flash if something abnormal occurs  
with the Monitor.  
6
button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn on and off (on standby) the  
Monitor when the POWER switch on the rear of the  
Monitor is “| (on).”  
3 2 / 3 / 5 / ∞ buttons  
Use these buttons to select menu items and to make  
adjustments.  
• When no menu is displayed, you can use the 2 / 3  
buttons to adjust the volume level.  
4 MENU button  
Use this button to display or erase menus.  
While a sub-menu is displayed, pressing this button will  
move you one screen back to the preceding menu.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitor: Rear Views 1  
1
2
3
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
R
R
R
Y/G  
Pb/B  
Pr/R  
HD/Cs  
VD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Y/C IN  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
COMPONENT/RGB B  
1 VIDEO A terminals (page 11)  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
3 COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals (page 11)  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
Connect these terminals to the audio output terminals of  
the other equipment.  
Connect these terminals to the audio input terminals of a  
VCR, etc.  
VIDEO IN terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
G, B, R, HD/Cs, VD (VIDEO) input terminals (BNC)  
Connect these terminals to the following output terminals  
of a personal computer or other equipment:  
– Analog RGB signal output terminals  
– Horizontal sync (HD) signal or composite (Cs) signal  
output terminal  
VIDEO OUT terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the video input terminal of  
another monitor, etc.  
– Vertical sync (VD) signal output terminal  
Note:  
Notes:  
• Since the video output terminals on this Monitor are  
loop-through terminals, the devices connected to this  
video output terminal should be correctly terminated.  
Otherwise, pictures become abnormally bright or the  
Monitor screen gets affected abnormally.  
• External sync signals are automatically detected when  
they come in.  
• When both horizontal (HD)/vertical (VD) sync and  
composite (Cs) sync are connected, HD/VD sync signals  
will be used.  
2 VIDEO B terminals (page 11)  
Y, Pb, Pr (VIDEO) input terminals (BNC)  
Connect these terminals to the component signal output  
terminals of NTSC or high-vision equipment.  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
Connect these terminals to the audio output terminals of a  
VCR, etc.  
Y/C (S video) IN terminal (mini DIN, 4pin)  
Connect this terminal to the S-video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
Note:  
• When these terminals are used as the component  
terminals (Y, Pb, Pr)—see “Setting the COMPONENT/  
RGB B Input” on page 20, external sync signals (HD/Cs,  
VD) cannot be used.  
VIDEO IN terminal (pin jack)  
Connect this terminal to the video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
Note:  
• When both the video and S-video terminals are  
connected, the S-video terminal will have priority.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts Identification  
(Continued)  
Monitor: Rear Views 2  
1
2
3
OPTION  
SPEAKER OUT  
R
L
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
4
5
6
7
8
OUT  
AUDIO  
L
MAKE  
R
IN  
RS-232C  
REMOTE  
WIRED  
POWER  
RGB A  
AUDIO  
AC IN  
1 OPTION terminal (page 13)  
5 REMOTE terminals (page 12)  
Connect the power cord of the Cooling Fan Unit (not  
supplied) when installing the Monitor vertically.  
RS-232C terminal (D-sub, 9 pin)  
Connect to the RS-232C terminal of a personal computer.  
For the control method using this terminal, consult an  
authorized JVC dealer.  
2 SPEAKER OUT L/R terminals (page 13)  
Connect external speakers, such as unique JVC speakers  
(not supplied), etc.  
MAKE terminal (mini DIN, 4pin)  
Connect an external control unit. (See page 12.)  
WIRED terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect a wired remote control unit to this terminal.  
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL (built-in speaker/external  
speaker) selecting switch (page 13)  
INTERNAL:  
EXTERNAL:  
To use built-in speakers.  
To use external speakers.  
Note:  
• Control signals through the MAKE terminal have  
priority over those through the other REMOTE  
terminals.  
4 RGB A input terminals (page 12)  
Input terminal (D-sub, 15 pin)  
Connect to the video output terminal of a personal  
computer.  
6 AUDIO OUT terminals (pin jack) (page 12)  
Connect to the audio input terminals of external  
equipment such as an amplifier.  
Note:  
• Use a cord as short as possible when connecting a  
personal computer to this terminal. (Recommended  
length is within 3 m.)  
7 AC IN terminal (page 12)  
Connect the supplied power cord to this terminal.  
AUDIO IN terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect to the audio output terminal of a personal  
computer.  
8 POWER switch (page 14)  
When this switch is set to “| (on),” you can turn on and  
off (on standby) the Monitor by using the POWER button  
on the remote control or the  
button on the Monitor.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control  
1
2
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
3
4
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
INPUT SELECT  
9
p
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
INPUT SELECT  
RGB A  
COMPO.  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
A
/(RGB B)  
5
6
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
MENU/EXIT  
7
8
MENU/EXIT  
1 Remote control cable jack (page 12)  
7 2 / 3 / 5 / ∞ buttons  
Connect the remote control cable (not supplied) when  
using this remote control as a wired remote control.  
Use these buttons to select menu items or make  
adjustments.  
2 Remote signal transmission window  
8 MENU/EXIT button  
Use this button to display or erase menus.  
While a sub-menu is displayed, pressing this button will  
move you one screen back to the preceding menu.  
3 POWER ON/OFF button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn on and off (on standby) the  
Monitor when the POWER switch on the rear of the  
Monitor is “| (on).”  
9 ASPECT button (page 15)  
Use this button to switch between aspect ratios. Each time  
you press the button, the aspect ratio changes as follows:  
4 DISPLAY button (page 14)  
Use this button to display the input terminal, color system  
(for VIDEO A or VIDEO B input), scan system (for  
COMPONENT input) and horizontal/vertical frequency  
(for RGB A and RGB B input).  
REGULAR  
FULL  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
p VOLUME + / – buttons (page 14)  
5 INPUT SELECT (VIDEO A, VIDEO B, COMPO./(RGB B) and  
RGB A) buttons  
Use these buttons to adjust the volume level.  
(page 14)  
Use these buttons to switch between inputs.  
To select the COMPONENT or RGB B input, you have to  
set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly on the menu (see page  
20).  
6 MUTING button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn off the volume immediately.  
Pressing the button again will resume the previous  
volume level.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparations  
Checking the Accessories  
The following accessories are included with the Monitor. Check for them. If any item is missing, please contact the dealer where  
you purchased the Monitor.  
• Remote control (RM-C579) x 1  
• Power cord x 2 (Use the one matching the wall outlet.)  
• Batteries (AA/R6P) x 2  
• Ferrite core x 2  
Installing the Batteries  
Put the batteries in the remote control as follows. If the remote control has become erratic in operation, change the batteries.  
1 Remove the back cover.  
While pushing the release lever on the cover, remove the cover in  
the direction of the arrow.  
2 Place the batteries.  
Put the two supplied batteries (AA/R6P), noting the ª and ·  
markings, as shown.  
3 Replace the back cover as illustrated.  
Make sure the release lever on the cover is locked in place correctly.  
Precautions for using batteries  
If batteries are used improperly, the liquid could leak out, causing a fire, injury, etc. or dirtying the vicinity.  
Take notice of the following:  
• Do not mix old and new batteries.  
• Do not mix different types of battery as different types may have different characteristics.  
• Place the batteries according to the ª and · markings indicated on the battery compartment.  
• When installing the batteries, insert the · end first to avoid a short circuit.  
• Use only the specified batteries.  
• When you are not using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.  
• When the batteries have reached the end of their life, replace them with new ones  
immediately. Otherwise, the liquid may leak out, or malfunction may be caused by  
the leaked liquid. If the leaked liquid contacts your skin, wipe off the liquid with a  
soft cloth. If the affected skin is left as is, you may get a rough skin.  
• Do not throw the batteries into fire or try recharging them.  
The instruction below applies  
only to the use in Holland.  
Gebruike batterijen:  
• The service life of batteries is six months to one year for normal use. The supplied  
batteries are only for checking the operation and their life may be shorter. When  
the remote control operation becomes erratic, replace with new batteries.  
About the Supplied Ferrite Core  
Be sure to attach the supplied ferrite cores to the speaker cords when using external speakers to reduce interference from the  
Monitor with external devices. See page 13.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Precautions  
• When installing the Monitor vertically, make sure the following:  
–Attach the external cooling fan unit to the Monitor. (See “Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit“ on page 13.)  
–Set the speed of the internal cooling fan to “HIGH.” (See “Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan“ on page 25.)  
• When installing the Monitor, be sure to use a dedicated Stand Unit, Wall Mounting Unit, or Monitor Hanger Unit, depending  
on a particular case. Ask your dealer for installation.  
• When installing the Monitor in a special way (for example, installing it diagonally), consult your dealer.  
• Route the power cord and connection cables along wall or floor corners to avoid walking on them.  
• For good heat dissipation, try to leave the following distances of space (minimum) around the Monitor.  
• The ambient temperature of the installation place should be within the range of 0˚C to 40˚C (slightly variable depending on  
ambient conditions for installation.)  
• When installing the Monitor in a place, such as near the ceiling, the remote control may not work correctly because of possible  
effects from the surroundings. If this happens, use the remote control as a wired remote control or move the Monitor where it  
is free from these effects.  
When installing the Monitor on a stand  
Front View  
Side View  
200  
Wall  
50  
150  
150  
MENU INPUT  
50  
Unit: mm  
Take measures against the Monitor from overturning:  
To protect against abnormal events such as earthquakes and to prevent unexpected accidents, take appropriate measures  
for preventing the Monitor from overturning; should it overturn, this could lead to personal injury.  
For detailed information, refer to the manual supplied for the stand.  
When mounting the Monitor on the wall  
When hanging the Monitor from the ceiling  
Front View  
Side View  
Side View  
50  
200  
200  
100  
100  
MENU INPUT  
50  
Unit: mm  
100  
Unit: mm  
Notes:  
• Do not allow the same image (pattern) to be continuously displayed on the screen for a long time; otherwise, the area on the  
screen corresponding to the image may vary in brightness, leaving an afterimage on the screen. To reduce the afterimage, you  
can use the Color Reverse function and the Refresh function (see pages 28 and 29).  
• The Monitor is manufactured using very high-precision technology, allowing for more than 99.99% active pixels, however, be  
aware that only a slight number of pixels may be deficient or lit at all times.  
• Do not install the Monitor in such a way that the Monitor and other AV equipment affect each other adversely. (For example,  
if a disturbed image or noise due to electromagnetic interference occurs, or if the infrared remote control malfunctions, change  
the installation place.)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Precautions  
• Before making connections, turn off all the equipment.  
• Use a cord whose plugs are correctly matching for the terminals on this Monitor and the equipment.  
• Plugs should be firmly inserted; poor connection could cause noise.  
• To unplug a cord, be sure to grasp its plug and pull it out.  
• Connect the power cord after having finished all other connections.  
• Refer also to the user manual of each piece of equipment.  
Available Signals  
Video signals  
The following signals can be input to this Monitor:  
• VIDEO A and VIDEO B terminals accept — PAL, PAL60, NTSC, NTSC 4.43, and SECAM signals.  
• COMPONENT/RGB B terminals accept — 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), and 1080/50i signals.  
(You need to set “COMPO./RGB B” to “COMPO.” on the menu (see page 20).  
Computer signals (Preset)  
This Monitor has 27 preset video modes for the most popular industrial standard, and the signals of the following image  
resolutions can be input to the RGB input terminals.  
Screen resolution  
Horizontal  
Horizontal  
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)  
Vertical  
No.  
Signal name  
Scan system  
Vertical  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PC98  
640  
640  
640  
852  
640  
640  
800  
800  
800  
400  
400  
480  
480  
480  
480  
600  
600  
600  
600  
768  
768  
768  
768  
768  
864  
1024  
1024  
1200  
1200  
1200  
480  
624  
768  
870  
—
24.8  
31.5  
31.5  
31.7  
37.9  
37.5  
35.2  
37.9  
48.1  
46.9  
48.4  
48.4  
56.5  
60.0  
68.7  
67.5  
64.0  
80.0  
75.0  
81.3  
87.5  
35.0  
49.7  
60.2  
68.7  
15.7  
15.6  
56.4  
70.1  
59.9  
60.3  
72.8  
75.0  
56.3  
60.3  
72.2  
75.0  
60.0  
60.0  
70.1  
75.0  
85.0  
75.0  
60.0  
75.0  
60.0  
65.0  
70.0  
66.7  
74.6  
74.9  
75.1  
59.9  
50.0  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Interlace  
VGA400-70  
VGA480-60  
WVGA-60  
VGA480-72  
VGA480-75  
SVGA-56  
SVGA-60  
SVGA-72  
SVGA-75  
XGA-60  
10  
800  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
1024  
1366  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1152  
1280  
1280  
1600  
1600  
1600  
640  
WXGA-60  
XGA-70  
XGA-75  
XGA-85  
XGA+-75  
SXGA-60  
SXGA-75  
UXGA-60  
UXGA-65  
UXGA-70  
MAC13”  
MAC16”  
MAC19”  
MAC21”  
RGB15K-60  
RGB15K-50  
832  
1024  
1152  
—
—
—
Interlace  
Notes:  
• When a signal other than listed above is input, a part of the screen may become void or an unnecessary picture may appear.  
• Signals, though they are within the acceptable range of frequencies, may not be displayed normally, depending on the signal  
type.  
• Depending on the connected equipment, the Monitor may not be compatible with composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signals.  
• When a preset mode signal is input, the vertical frequency displayed on the screen will have an “*” shown at its right top  
position.  
• When the No. 4 and No. 12 signals are input, change the aspect ratio to “FULL” with the ASPECT button (page 15) on the  
remote control or from the “FUNCTION SELECT” menu (see page 19).  
• When No. 16 to No. 21 and No. 25 signals are input, thin lines may become obscure for their signal frequencies are higher  
than the screen resolution. Using the RGB A input terminals makes the lines clearer than using the RGB B input terminals.  
• The adjustment of the screen size and position is the setting common to the No. 14 and No. 24 signals. If you use both signals  
by switching them, the adjustment of either signal may not be proper.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection Diagrams  
AV connections  
VCR 1  
DVD player, etc.  
VCR 2  
(used as the playback source)  
(used as the playback source)  
(used as the playback source)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
R
R
R
Y/G  
Pb/B  
Pr/R  
HD/Cs  
VD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Y/C IN  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
COMPONENT/RGB B  
When connecting another PC to the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals, set the “COMPO./RGB B” setting to  
“RGB B” (see page 20).  
To audio output  
To G output  
To B output  
Personal computer  
To R output  
(used as the playback  
source)  
To HD/Cs output  
To VD output  
Notes:  
• You can connect another VCR or Monitor to the VIDEO A OUT terminal. However, when connecting a VCR to the  
VIDEO A terminals, do not connect both IN and OUT terminals to the same VCR.  
• When connecting a VCR to the VIDEO B terminals, you can use either the video or S-video terminals. If the both  
terminals are used, S-video terminal will have priority.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
(Continued)  
Typical connections  
❊ For connection, see “Connecting an  
External Control Unit” below.  
Personal computer  
Personal computer  
Remote control  
(used to control the Monitor)  
(used as the playback source)  
(supplied)  
M E N U / E X I T  
Amplifier, etc.  
O
V L U M E  
M U T I N G  
V I D E O  
A B G  
B
A
R
B )  
.
/ ( R C G O B M P O  
I N P U T S E L E C T  
A S P E C T  
Y
D I S P L A  
O F F  
O N  
W E  
P R O  
U N I T O L  
C O N  
T
T
E
R
R E M O  
R M – C 5 7 9  
Cable with stereo  
mini jacks  
(not supplied)  
Power cord (supplied)  
❊
To a wall outlet  
OUT  
AUDIO  
IN  
L
MAKE  
R
RS-232C  
WIRED  
REMOTE  
RGB A  
AUDIO  
AC IN  
POWER  
Connecting an External Control Unit  
When connecting the external control unit to the MAKE terminal, you can operate the following functions through the MAKE  
terminal;  
• Turn on or off the Monitor.  
Preparation: The POWER switch on the rear must be set to “| (on)” (so that the Monitor is in standby mode).  
• Select the input.  
Preparation: “REMOTE SWITCH” should be set correctly to select your desired input (see page 24).  
Notes:  
• There is no remote control on/off switch. When a plug is inserted to the MAKE terminal, remote control through the external  
control unit is automatically activated.  
• When the other REMOTE terminals are used at the same time, control signals through the MAKE terminal have priority over  
those through the other terminals.  
• MAKE terminal  
• External control unit  
Pin number Signal name  
3
1
4
2
1
2
3
4
GND  
GND  
SW2  
SW1  
Opening  
Power Off  
Input A*  
Short-circuiting  
Power On  
Input B*  
=
=
*
Input A and Input B will be determined by the “REMOTE  
SWITCH” setting.  
IMPORTANT:  
External control unit is not commercially available in the market. When you need it, consult your dealer.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External Speaker Connection  
External speakers  
(Ex. TS-C500SPG)  
Note:  
It is recommended to use the  
speaker unit—TS-C500SPG  
(not supplied) as the external  
speakers. You can also  
connect any speakers of the  
following specifications:  
• Impedance: Between 6 Ω  
and 8 Ω  
When using external  
speakers, set this to  
EXTERNAL.  
• Power handling capacity:  
More than 3 W  
To speaker  
To speaker  
input terminals  
input terminals  
Ferrite core (supplied)  
How to connect the cords  
Attach the supplied ferrite cores to the speaker cords when using external speakers.  
Attach the ferrite cores as near to the SPEAKER OUT L/R terminals on the rear panel  
of the Monitor as possible.  
How to attach the ferrite core  
Caution:  
• Do not short-circuit the 9 and (  
speaker cords each other. (Refer also to  
the instructions supplied with the  
speaker unit when connecting  
speakers.)  
Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit  
When installing this Monitor vertically, it is  
required to attach the external cooling fan  
unit (not supplied).  
Notes:  
• When installing this Monitor vertically, it is  
also required to set the speed of the internal  
cooling fan to “HIGH” (see page 25).  
• If you install the Monitor in such a way not  
instructed in this manual (for example,  
installing it diagonally), the cooling fan unit  
may not be able to cool down the internal  
heat enough to make the Monitor operate;  
therefore, reinstallation or another method  
for cooling will be required. Consult your  
dealer in such a case.  
Cooling Fan Unit:  
TS-C01FANG  
(not supplied)  
ACIN  
L
R
OTU  
ADUIO  
MKAE  
WRIED  
R-S32C  
ROMTE  
OTPINO  
RBGA  
ADUIO  
IN  
• For more detailed connection, refer to the  
manual supplied with the external cooling  
fan unit.  
Cooling Fan Unit:  
TS-C01FANG  
(not supplied)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Daily Operations  
1 Turn on the main power.  
Set the POWER switch on the rear of the Monitor to “|  
(on)”.  
Rear View  
The power lamp on the upper left of the front panel  
lights orange.  
• If you have turned off the Monitor not by using  
POWER ON on the remote control (or  
on the front  
panel), but by using the POWER switch, setting the  
power switch to “| (on)” lights the power lamp green  
and turns the Monitor on.  
2 Turn on the power.  
Press POWER ON on the remote control to turn the power  
on.  
The power lamp lights green.  
• You can also use  
turn on the Monitor.  
on the front panel (lower right) to  
1
3 Select an input.  
Select the desired input by pressing INPUT SELECT  
(VIDEO A, VIDEO B, COMPO./(RGB B) and RGB A).  
• You can also select the input by pressing INPUT on the  
Monitor. Each time you press the button, the input  
mode changes in sequence.  
POWER  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
RGB A  
COMPONENT or RGB B  
Ex. When selecting “VIDEO A” input  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Input selected  
Input video signal  
Note:  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
2
4
• To select “COMPONENT” or “RGB B,” you need to set the  
“COMPO./RGB B” setting correctly.  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
DISPLAY  
INPUT SELECT  
4 Adjust the volume.  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
3
VIDEO  
B
:
10  
VOLUME  
+
–
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
Note:  
MUTING  
• While no menu is displayed, you can adjust the volume by  
pressing 2 / 3 on the Monitor.  
To turn off the volume immediately  
Press MUTING.  
“MUTING ON” is displayed, and the sound goes out.  
Pressing the button again resumes the previous volume level.  
MENU/EXIT  
To make the screen indication appear  
Press DISPLAY.  
The types of input and signal are indicated on the screen for  
about 3 seconds.  
You can also make the screen indication appear using menus  
(page 22).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
With this Monitor, you can select among three types of wide  
screens (FULL, ZOOM, and PANORAMIC) in addition to the  
REGULAR screen of conventional 4:3 aspect ratio.  
Press ASPECT to select the screen size.  
Each time you press the button, the screen size changes as  
follows:  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
REGULAR  
FULL  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
REGULAR:  
Displays at conventional 4:3 aspect ratio.  
ASPECT  
INPUT SELECT  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
FULL:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
horizontally.  
MENU/EXIT  
ZOOM:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
vertically and horizontally at the same ratio.  
PANORAMIC:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
horizontally to the extent that the picture  
does not look abnormally.  
Precautions for using the screen mode switching function  
• This Monitor features a screen mode switching (aspect ratio  
change) function. If you select a mode different in aspect  
ratio from software such as TV programs, the picture may  
look different from original picture. Be aware of this point  
when you are selecting a screen mode.  
• If you select a wide screen mode while viewing  
conventional video programs of the aspect ratio 4:3, some  
portions (edges) of the original picture will be cut off, or  
deformed. To enjoy the original picture as it is, select  
“REGULAR” while viewing such programs.  
• If you place the Monitor in a tea room, hotel, etc. for  
business purposes or public viewing and modify the picture  
by using the screen mode switching (aspect ratio change)  
function, this could violate the copyright protected by the  
copyright law, which requires your special attention.  
• If you make the screen very bright and watch programs  
selecting “REGULAR,” for a long period of time, the  
Monitor screen may happen to be burned in. If this occurs,  
watching programs using a wide screen mode for a while  
will reduce the burn-in gradually.  
Notes:  
• When one of the following signals is being input, you  
cannot select the aspect ratio you want.  
I 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can only select FULL.  
I When any signal other than RGB15K-60 and RGB15K-50  
through the RGB A or COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can select only REGULAR and FULL.  
• The aspect ratio can also be changed on the “FUNCTION  
SELECT” Menu (see page 19).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
Adjusting the Picture Quality  
Picture quality can be set for each input mode.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MENU INPUT  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
MENU INPUT  
“PICTURE ADJ.”  
3 Press 3 to display the Picture  
Adjustment Menu.  
VIDEO  
A
PICTURE ADJ.  
5
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
5 /  
MENU  
2 / 3  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
item you want to adjust.  
Item  
Adjustment  
range  
Standard  
(Reset)  
CONTRAST  
–20 to +20  
+10  
00  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
BRIGHT (brightness) –20 to +20  
1
*
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
CHROMA  
–20 to +20  
–20 to +20  
–10 to +10  
00  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
2
*
PHASE  
00  
INPUT SELECT  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
00  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
See “To make an adjustment  
while viewing the adjustment  
bar” on the next page.  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
reset  
See “To reset the adjustments” on  
the next page.  
1 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC, PAL, or SECAM  
signal, or component signal.  
*
2 / 3  
5 /  
5
2 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC signal or  
*
component signal.  
MENU/EXIT  
MENU/EXIT  
5 Press 2/3 to make adjustments.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
Adjusting the Screen Size and Position  
bar  
The screen size and position can be adjusted.  
Adjusted settings can be stored for each signal type; therefore,  
when the same signal comes in, the stored settings are  
recalled.  
After step 3 on page 16, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
• When adjusting the size, the size cannot be adjusted  
proportionally, but can be enlarged rightward (or  
downward) only and reduced leftward (or upward) only.  
Therefore, it is necessary to adjust both the size and position  
alternately to adjust to the appropriate size.  
The Sub Menu for CONTRAST appears on the screen.  
:+01  
CONTRAST  
+
–
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
MAIN MENU  
SHARPNESS  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SIZE/POSITION ADJ.”  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 16, proceed as follows:  
MAIN MENU  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
reset  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
3 Press 3 to display the Size/Position  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
Adjustment Menu.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
H
H
V
V
SIZE  
POSITION  
SIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
CLOCK PHASE  
sub menu  
reset  
*
00  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
* Appearing and being adjustable only when you use RGB A or  
RGB B input.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
(Continued)  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
bar  
item you want to adjust.  
After step 3 on page 17, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
The Sub Menu for H SIZE appears on the screen.  
Item  
Adjustment range  
H (horizontal) SIZE*1 –40 to +40  
H POSITION*1  
Varies depending on other  
:+01  
H
SIZE  
settings  
++  
+
+
V (vertical) SIZE*1  
V POSITION*1  
–40 to +40  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
Varies depending on other  
settings  
DOT CLOCK*2  
–10 to +10  
–20 to +20  
H SIZE  
H POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
V SIZE  
CLOCK PHASE*2  
CLOCK PHASE  
V POSITION  
sub menu  
reset  
See “To make an adjustment  
while viewing the adjustment  
bar” on the right column.  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
See “To reset the adjustments” on  
the right column.  
*1 Size and position adjustments are so related that if one  
is adjusted much, the other’s adjustable range will be  
reduced.  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 17, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
*2 DOT CLOCK is the function to adjust the pixel  
sampling number of the A/D converter to the  
resolution (the vertical pixel number) of the input  
signal.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
CLOCK PHASE is the function to adjust the sampling  
timing (phase) to the phase of the input signal.  
You can use the two functions to reduce flickering and  
blurring on the screen when using the RGB A or RGB  
B input.  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
5 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
Note:  
Note:  
• Adjustment values for both horizontal and vertical sizes of  
the screen are so related that if one is adjusted up to near  
the maximum value, the attainable value of the other will  
be decreased.  
• During size and position adjustments, the Monitor  
screen may be distorted. This is normal, but not a  
malfunction of the Monitor.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Color Temperature  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
The adjusted setting applies to all inputs.  
The setting adjusted applies to all inputs.  
• You can change the aspect ratio by pressing ASPECT. (See  
page 15.)  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
MAIN MENU  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
FUNCTION SELECT  
“ * ” appears  
Selection Menu.  
only when you  
have adjusted  
the White  
Balance (see  
the right  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
FUNCTION SELECT  
B
B
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
column).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
1
*
*1 *2 *3  
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
2
3
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
2
3
*
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“COLOR TEMP.”  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“ASPECT.”  
5 Press 2/3 to make an adjustment.  
Each time you press the button, the color temperature  
alternates between “HIGH” and “LOW.”  
5 Press 2/3 to select an aspect ratio you  
want.  
HIGH:  
LOW:  
To make the screen become bluish.  
To make the screen become reddish.  
Each time you press the button, the aspect ratio changes  
as follows:  
REGULAR  
FULL  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
* For detailed information on these aspect ratios, see  
page 15.  
Note:  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
• To make a fine adjustment, adjust “WHITE BALANCE” (see  
page 25).  
Note:  
• When one of the following signals is being input, you  
cannot select the aspect ratio you want.  
I 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
Aspect ratio is fixed to FULL (“ASPECT” does not appear  
on the display).  
I When any signal other than RGB15K-60 and RGB15K-50  
through the RGB A or COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can select only REGULAR and FULL.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
(Continued)  
Setting the Receivable Signal Types  
Setting the COMPONENT/RGB B Input  
You can set the receivable signal types. Normally, select  
“AUTO.”  
A common setting will apply to both the VIDEO A input and  
the VIDEO B input, and a different setting will apply to the  
COMPONENT input.  
After connecting the playback device such as a PC or a DVD  
player to the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals, you have to  
specify which type of signal comes into this terminal—RGB or  
component signals.  
• Without setting “COMPO./RGB B” correctly, you cannot  
show any picture though you select the COMPONENT or  
RGB B input.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
MAIN MENU  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
Selection Menu.  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
FUNCTION SELECT  
Selection Menu.  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
B
B
*1 *2 *3  
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
1
*
2
3
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
*
2
3
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SIGNAL MODE.”  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
5 Press 2/3 to select the receivable video  
“COMPO./RGB B”  
signal type.  
Each time you press the button, the receivable video  
signal type changes as follows:  
5 Press 2/3 to select the type of signal.  
• When VIDEO A or VIDEO B input is selected:  
COMPO.: When connecting the playback device such as  
a DVD player, which can emit the component  
signals.  
AUTO  
PAL60  
NTSC  
N4.43  
PAL  
SECAM  
RGB B: When connecting the playback device such as  
(NTSC 4.43)  
a PC, which can emit the RGB signals.  
• When COMPONENT input is selected:  
The setting changes and the “FUNCTION SELECT”  
Menu disappears.  
AUTO  
480i  
576i  
480p  
576p  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
(1035i)*  
720/50p  
720/60p  
* Changes according to the “HD SIGNAL MODE”  
setting (see page 24).  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Resistance of the RGB B  
Input Terminals  
Resetting the Function Selection Menu Settings  
You can reset all the Function Selection Menu settings at a  
time.  
You can set the resistance of the two of the RGB B input  
terminals to either HIGH (1 kΩ) or LOW (75 Ω):  
• HD/Cs (Horizontal sync/Composite) terminal  
• VD (Vertical sync) terminal.  
HIGH is the normal setting. Change the setting to LOW when  
you use a long connecting cord and the picture flickers and  
blurs on the screen.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
FUNCTION SELECT  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
FUNCTION SELECT  
1
*
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
B
B
2
3
*
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*1 *2 *3  
*
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
2
3
*
“reset.”  
*
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
5 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
“SYNC TERM.”  
5 Press 2/3 to select the terminal  
resistance.  
6 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
Each time you press the button, the resistance alternates  
between “HIGH” and “LOW.”  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
HIGH:  
LOW:  
Initial setting. Normally select this.  
When using a long connecting cord and the  
picture flickering and blurring on the screen.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
Showing On-screen Display  
The input mode and signal type will be indicated on the  
screen.  
• You can also show these information by pressing DISPLAY  
on the remote control. (See page 14.)  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MENU INPUT  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MENU INPUT  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“STATUS DISPLAY.”  
3 Press 3 to display the current input  
5
5 /  
MENU  
2 / 3  
terminal and received signal type.  
Ex. When selecting “VIDEO A” or “VIDEO B” input  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
Input selected  
Input Video signal  
type  
Ex. When selecting “COMPONENT” input  
COMPONENT  
480i  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Ex. When selecting “RGB A” or “RGB B” input  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
RGB  
B
(BNC)  
60.3Hz*  
37.9kHz  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
When the signal being input is a preset video  
mode, an “*” will be shown after the  
frequency.  
INPUT SELECT  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
Note:  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
• If you want to make these information appear automatically  
when you change the input mode, see “Showing the  
On-screen When Changing the Input Mode” on page 23.  
VOLUME –  
2 / 3  
5 /  
5
MENU/EXIT  
MENU/EXIT  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Showing the On-screen When Changing  
the Input Mode  
Prohibiting the Monitor’s Button Operations  
This function allows you to prohibit the button operations on  
the Monitor to prevent malfunction or avoid tampering.  
With this function, you can see the selected input mode and  
signal type when changing the input mode.  
1 On the remote control:  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“CONTROL LOCK.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“STATUS DISPLAY.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Control Lock  
function alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Status Display  
function alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
To cancel the Control Lock function, select “OFF.”  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
To cancel the Status Display function, select “OFF.”  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
Note:  
• Even when the Control Lock function is in use, the  
following operations are possible:  
– Operation to cancel the Control Lock function  
– All operations from the remote control  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
Setting the Remote-Controllable Input  
Setting the High-Definition Signal Types  
When connecting the external control unit to the REMOTE  
MAKE terminal, you need to set the desired input to use,  
which you can select from the connected external control unit.  
You can select one of the High-Definition (HD) signal types  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals — 1080i or  
1035i. Normally set it to “1080i.”  
• Without setting “COMPO./RGB B” correctly, you cannot  
show any picture though you select the COMPONENT  
input (see page 20).  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
“REMOTE SWITCH.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“HD SIGNAL MODE.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Remote Switch  
Mode changes as follows:  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the HD signal type  
alternates between “1080i” and “1035i.”  
MODE1: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“VIDEO B” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
• You can select either “1080i” and “1035i” according to  
the HD signal you input — whichever gives you  
proportionally shaped pictures.  
MODE2: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“COMPONENT/RGB B” when controlled  
from the external control unit.  
MODE3: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“RGB A” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
MODE4: Input alternates between “VIDEO B” and  
“COMPONENT/RGB B” when controlled  
from the external control unit.  
MODE5: Input alternates between “VIDEO B” and  
“RGB A” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
MODE6: Input alternates between “COMPONENT/  
RGB B” and “RGB A” when controlled from  
the external control unit.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan  
Adjusting the White Balance  
Set the speed of the internal cooling fan to “HIGH” when  
installing the Monitor vertically, so that the internal heat of  
the Monitor is released more effectively.  
G GAIN, B GAIN and R GAIN can be finely adjusted  
separately for “HIGH” and “LOW” settings of the color  
temperature.  
Note:  
1 On the remote control:  
• When installing this Monitor vertically, it is also required to  
attach the external cooling fan unit. (See page 13.)  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“WHITE BALANCE.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
3 Press 3 to display the White Balance  
“FAN SPEED.”  
Adjustment Menu.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
WHITE BALANCE:HIGH  
R
G
B
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
:
:
:
000  
001  
002  
+
–
sub menu  
reset  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the speed of the internal  
cooling fan changes as follows:  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
LOW:  
Initial setting. Normally select this.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
HIGH:  
Select this when installing the Monitor  
vertically.  
item you want to adjust.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
5 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the other  
items.  
7 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
Notes:  
• Adjustable range will vary among the Monitors.  
• “MAX” may appear soon after you begin adjustment. This  
is normal but not a malfunction.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
bars  
After step 3 on page 25, proceed as follows:  
Setting the Clock and the Power On/Off Timer  
You can turn the Monitor on and off automatically with the  
Power On/Off timer.  
• Since you cannot use the timer functions without setting  
the clock, set the clock at first.  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
The Sub Menu for R GAIN appears on the screen.  
• Setting the Clock  
You can also adjust the clock with the following procedure.  
:
000  
+
R
GAIN  
–
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
R GAIN  
G GAIN  
On the Monitor:  
B GAIN  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 25, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
The confirmation screen appears.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“TIMER,” then press 3 to display the  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
Timer Menu.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
Before the clock setting  
After the clock setting  
TIMER  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
:
:
:
:
:
––:––  
OFF  
––:––  
OFF  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
P
OWER-ON TIME  
P
OWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
21:20  
––:––  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PRESENT TIME,” then press 3.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“HOURS,” then press 2/3 repeatedly to  
adjust the hour (24 hour clock).  
5 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“MINUTES,” then press 2/3 repeatedly  
to adjust the minute.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) three times to exit from the  
menu operations.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Using the Power On/Off Timer  
Select the item you want to set in step 3 in “Setting the  
Clock” (page 26) and follow the instructions below.  
About the Timer Battery  
The timer clock works on the battery embedded in the  
Monitor.  
If the battery becomes weak or has already run out, a message  
appears on the TIMER, COLOR-REVERSE, and REFRESH  
menus.  
POWER-ON SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Power-On Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The Monitor automatically turns on at the time  
set in “POWER-ON TIME.”  
When the battery becomes weak (BATTERY LOW)  
“BATTERY LOW” appears on the screen.  
OFF: The Power-On Timer is deactivated.  
TIMER  
POWER-ON TIME  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
POWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
You can adjust the time to turn on the Monitor.  
Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in “Setting  
the Clock” (page 26).  
21:20  
BATTERY LOW  
SELECT: EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
POWER-OFF SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Power-Off Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The Monitor automatically turns off at the time  
set in “POWER-OFF TIME.”  
When the battery has run out (BATTERY EMPTY)  
“BATTERY EMPTY” appears on the screen.  
OFF: The Power-Off Timer is deactivated.  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
POWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
––:––  
OFF  
––:––  
OFF  
POWER-OFF TIME  
––:––  
You can adjust the time to turn off the Monitor.  
Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in “Setting  
the Clock” (page 26).  
BATTERY EMPTY  
SELECT: EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
To reset the timer setting  
The clock is reset and “PRESENT TIME” is shown as “-- : --.”  
• You cannot replace the battery yourself. Please consult your  
dealer to replace it.  
• Set the clock and the timer functions (Power On/Off Timer,  
Color-Reverse On/Off Timer, and Refresh On/Off Timer)  
again after replacing the battery.  
After step 2 on page 26, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
• You can use functions other than the timer functions  
without replacing the battery.  
key.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
Using the Pixel Shift Function  
“POWER SAVE” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
This function periodically shift the position (pixels) of the  
displayed picture on the screen so that you can avoid the  
screen from being burned in.  
1 On the remote control:  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
:
123  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
E
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
SAVE1: The screen gets dim.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SAVE2: The screen gets dimmer.  
OFF: The Power Save function is deactivate.  
To cancel the Power Save function, select “OFF.”  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PIXEL SHIFT” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
Reducing the Afterimage Effect  
If the same image (pattern) is continuously displayed on the  
screen for a long time, the area on the screen corresponding to  
the image may vary in brightness, leaving an afterimage on  
the screen.  
You can reduce the afterimage by reversing the color of the  
image on the screen.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
You can activate/deactivate the function with the Color-  
Reverse On/Off Timer.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Pixel Shift function  
alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
• Display the image which has been caused the afterimage on  
the screen before starting the following procedure.  
To cancel the Pixel Shift function, select “OFF.”  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Using the Power Save Function  
You can use this function to reduce the electrical consumption  
and to extend the lifetime of the Monitor’s screen.  
• The brightness of the screen will be reduced.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
1 On the remote control:  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To reset the Color-Reverse setting  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
After step 2 on the left column, proceed as follows:  
“COLOR-REVERSE” (on the second  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
page), then press 3.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
E
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Note:  
• The Color-Reverse function requires considerable time to  
reduce the afterimage. Deactivate the function temporarily  
at intervals of 30 minutes-1 hour and check the screen if the  
afterimage still remains or not. Set the function to off if the  
afterimage has been reduced.  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the item you want  
to set and set the item as follows.  
COLOR-REVERSE  
You can activate/deactivate the function manually.  
Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Refreshing the Screen  
After the power is turned off, a whitish image may be left on  
the screen. In that case, leave the monitor in a white back state  
for a while, and the image will disappear.  
You can activate/deactivate the function with the Refresh  
On/Off Timer.  
ON:  
The function is activated immediately after  
exiting the menu operations.  
OFF: The function is deactivated.  
TIMER: Select this when you use the Color-Reverse  
On/Off Timer.  
Note:  
• Set the clock (see page 26) and select “TIMER,” before  
using the Color-Reverse On/Off Timer.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
START SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Color-Reverse On Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically activated at the  
time set in “START TIME.”  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
OFF: The Color-Reverse On Timer is deactivated.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
START TIME  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
You can adjust the time to activate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
END SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Color-Reverse Off Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically deactivated at the  
time set in “END TIME.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“REFRESH” (on the second page) then  
press 3.  
OFF: The Color-Reverse Off Timer is deactivated.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
END TIME  
You can adjust the time to deactivate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
:
123  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) repeatedly to exit from the  
menu operations.  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
(To be continued on the next page)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
Note:  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the item you want  
• The Refresh function requires considerable time to reduce  
the afterimage. Deactivate the function temporarily at  
intervals of 30 minutes-1 hour and check the screen if the  
afterimage still remains or not. Set the function to off if the  
afterimage has been reduced.  
to set and set the item as follows.  
REFRESH  
You can activate/deactivate the function manually.  
• Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
ON:  
The function is activated immediately after  
exiting the menu operations.  
Notes on the Color-Reverse/Refresh Timer  
OFF:  
The function is deactivated.  
• Once you set the Color-Reverse/Refresh timer, the timer  
function is still activated even if you turn off the power.  
If you turn on the power after the “START TIME” you  
set, Color-Reverse/Refresh function is activated.  
To cancel the function, select “OFF” in the menu  
(see pages 29 and 30).  
TIMER: Select this when you use the Refresh On/Off  
Timer.  
Note:  
• Set the clock (see page 26) and select “TIMER,” before  
using the Refresh On/Off Timer.  
START SET  
• The Color-Reverse timer is deactivated when you turn  
on or off the Color-Reverse function manually.  
The Refresh timer works in the same way as mentioned  
above.  
Select “TIMER” in the menu to control the functions  
automatically (see pages 29 and 30).  
You can activate/deactivate the Refresh On Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically activated at the  
time set in “START TIME.”  
OFF: The Refresh On Timer is deactivated.  
START TIME  
You can adjust the time to activate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
Resetting All the Setup Menu Settings  
You can reset all the following Setup Menu settings at a time,  
except the use time (HOUR METER).  
END SET  
1 On the remote control:  
You can activate/deactivate the Refresh Off Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically deactivated at the  
time set in “END TIME.”  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
OFF: The Refresh Off Timer is deactivated.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
END TIME  
You can adjust the time to deactivate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 on  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) repeatedly to exit from the  
menu operations.  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To reset the Reflesh function setting  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
After step 2 above, proceed as follows:  
“reset” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
key.  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
E
.
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press 3.  
4 Press 3 again to reset all the Menu  
The confirmation screen appears.  
settings and adjustments.  
The power is turned off, then turned on again  
automatically.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
Confirming the Use Time and Model Information  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
You can confirm the hours of use and the model information  
on the Setup Menu.  
This may be necessary when you ask for any service.  
4 Press 3 again to reset all the Setup  
Menu settings.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
Resetting All the Menu Settings  
You can reset all the Menu settings and adjustments at a time,  
except the use time (HOUR METER).  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
2 Keep pressing 5/∞ until the second  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
page of the Setup Menu appears.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “all  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
Hours of use  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Model  
Information  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
3 Confirm the hour of use and model  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
information.  
• The displayed value for the hours of use is divided by  
100. To calculate the actual hours of use, multiply the  
displayed value by 100.  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
3 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
all reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
Notes:  
• The value for the hours of use is added by one hour unit. If  
you use the monitor within one hour, it will not be added to  
the hours of use.  
• The period when the monitor is on standby (the power  
lamp glows orange) will not be added to the hours of use.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Classifications  
Main Menu  
Picture Adjustment Menu  
:+01  
CONTRAST  
–
+
VIDEO  
A
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
PICTURE ADJ.  
:+01  
BRIGHT  
–
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
+
:+01  
CHROMA  
–
+
:+01  
PHASE  
–
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
+
:+01  
SHARPNESS  
+
–
*1 *2  
*1 *2  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
then  
key.  
key.  
Size/Position Adjustment Menu  
:+01  
H
SIZE  
++  
+
+
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
H
H
V
V
SIZE  
POSITION  
SIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
00  
:+01  
H
POSITION  
SIZE  
++  
+ +  
POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
CLOCK PHASE  
sub menu  
reset  
:+01  
:+01  
V
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
V
POSITION  
:+01  
DOT CLOCK  
–
+
3
3
*
*
:+01  
CLOCK PHASE  
–
+
reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
"YES"  
key.  
"NO" then MENU  
key.  
Function Selection Menu  
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
B
B
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
then  
key.  
key.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
5
4
6
*
*
*
Status Display  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
Input currently selected  
Input video signal  
Ex. When “VIDEO A” input is selected.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE ADJ. (Picture adjustment): See page 16.  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
Adjusts the contrast of the picture.  
Adjusts the brightness of the picture.  
Adjusts the color density of the picture.  
Adjusts the color phase.  
CHROMA*1  
PHASE*2  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
Adjusts the outlines of the picture.  
Displays the fine adjustment bar.  
Resets the Picture Adjustment Menu settings to defaults.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ. : See page 17.  
H SIZE  
Adjusts the horizontal screen size.  
H POSITION  
Adjusts the horizontal screen position.  
V SIZE  
Adjusts the vertical screen size.  
V POSITION  
DOT CLOCK*3  
Adjusts the vertical screen position.  
Adjusts to eliminate stripes or flickering. Use with “CLOCK PHASE.”  
Normally, no adjustment is needed.  
Adjusts to eliminate stripes or flickering. Use with “DOT CLOCK.”  
Normally, no adjustment is needed.  
CLOCK PHASE*3  
sub menu  
reset  
Displays the fine adjustment bar.  
Resets Size/position Adjustment Menu settings to defaults.  
FUNCTION SELECT: See pages 19 to 21.  
COLOR TEMP.  
Adjusts the color temperature.  
Use when the picture is reddish or bluish.  
Selects the horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen.  
• Selects a color system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM, N4.43 (NTSC 4.43), PAL60) when VIDEO A or  
ASPECT*4  
SIGNAL MODE*5  
VIDEO B input is selected. Normally, set to “AUTO.”  
• Selects a scan system—480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035i), 1080/50i—  
when COMPONENT input is selected. Normally, set to “AUTO.”  
Selects the usage of the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals either as the COMPONENT input  
terminal or as the RGB B input terminal.  
Adjusts the resistance of RGB B input terminals.  
Resets the Function Selection Menu settings to defaults.  
COMPO./RGB B  
SYNC TERM.*6  
reset  
STATUS DISPLAY: See page 22.  
Shows the input mode and signal type on the screen.  
*1 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC, PAL, or SECAM signal, or component signal.  
*2 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC signal or component signal.  
*3 Adjustable when RGB A or RGB B input is selected.  
*4 Not adjustable when viewing the following component signals—720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), and 1080/50i. ( In  
such a case, “ASPECT” does not appear on the display.)  
*5 Adjustable when VIDEO A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
*6 Adjustable when RGB B input is selected.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Classifications  
(Continued)  
Setup Menu  
White Balance Adjustment Menu  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
:
000  
+
R
GAIN  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
–
WHITE BALANCE:HIGH  
R
G
B
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
:
:
:
000  
001  
002  
:+001  
+
G
GAIN  
+
–
–
sub menu  
reset  
:–002  
B
GAIN  
+
–
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
key.  
key.  
Reset Confirmation Screen  
Timer Menu  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
OWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
HOURS  
:
:
:
14:25  
14  
25  
P
MINUTES  
21:20  
TIMER  
POWER-ON TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
08:26  
08  
26  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
TIMER  
POWER-OFF TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
21:20  
21  
20  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
Color-Reverse Menu  
SET-UP MENU  
2/2  
COLOR-REVERSE  
PIXEL SHIFT  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
COLOR-REVERSE  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ON  
08:06  
ON  
21:47  
COLOR-REVERSE  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
START SET  
START TIME  
END SET  
END TIME  
reset  
START TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
08:06  
08  
06  
HOUR METER x100h  
:
123  
MODEL  
:GM-X50  
Ver.  
.
A
E
COLOR-REVERSE  
CATEGORY  
END TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
21:47  
21  
47  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
Refresh Menu  
REFRESH  
REFRESH  
START SET  
START TIME  
END SET  
END TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ON  
12:10  
ON  
REFRESH  
START TIME  
HOURS  
:
:
:
12:10  
12  
10  
MINUTES  
14:24  
REFRESH  
END TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
14:24  
14  
24  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
all reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
then  
"YES"  
"NO"  
key.  
key.  
MENU  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATUS DISPLAY: See page 23.  
Sets if you want the input terminal and the type of signal to be indicated on the screen just after inputs are switched.  
CONTROL LOCK: See page 23.  
Sets the Monitor so that it cannot be operated with the buttons on itself.  
REMOTE SWITCH: See page 24.  
Set the selectable input terminals when controlling the Monitor with the external control unit.  
HD SIGNAL MODE: See page 24.  
Select the High-Definition (HD) signal type.  
FAN SPEED: See page 25.  
Sets the speed of the internal cooling fan.  
WHITE BALANCE: See page 25.  
Adjusts R GAIN, G GAIN and B GAIN finely each for “HIGH” and “LOW” settings of the color temperature.  
TIMER: See pages 26 and 27.  
Sets the clock and the Power On/Off Timer.  
PIXEL SHIFT: See page 28.  
Sets a screen saver.  
POWER SAVE: See page 28.  
Sets the power save function.  
COLOR-REVERSE: See page 28.  
Use to reduce the afterimage on the screen of the still picture by reversing the color.  
REFRESH: See page 29.  
Use to reduce the whitish image remaining on the screen after turning off the power.  
reset: See page 30.  
Resets the Setup Menu settings to defaults.  
all reset: See page 31.  
Resets the all menu settings and adjustments to defaults.  
HOUR METER x 100h: See page 31.  
Use to confirm the hours of use.  
MODEL: See page 31.  
Use to confirm the model information of the Monitor.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Solutions to common problems related to the Monitor are described here. If none of the solutions presented here solves the  
problem, unplug the Monitor and consult an authorized dealer or service center.  
Symptom  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
•Insert the power cord (plug) firmly.  
•Turn on the POWER switch.  
Page  
12  
Power is not supplied. •Is the power cord disconnected?  
•Is the POWER switch turned on?  
14  
Power is suddenly  
turned on or off.  
•Is the Power On/Off Timer activated? •Set the timer to “OFF” on the menu.  
26  
14  
Video image does not •Is the correct input selected?  
appear, or audio  
sound does not occur.  
•Select the correct input by pressing  
INPUT SELECT (VIDEO A, VIDEO B,  
COMPO./(RGB B) or RGB A) on the  
remote control (or INPUT on the  
Monitor).  
•Are the devices connected correctly?  
•Connect the devices correctly.  
•Set the devices correctly.  
•Set it correctly.  
11, 12  
—
•Are signals being supplied from the  
connected devices?  
•Is “COMPO./RGB B” set correctly if  
using the COMPONENT/RGB B  
terminals?  
20  
10  
•Are input signals (scanning frequency, •Check if the signal is appropriate  
etc.) appropriate?  
(scanning frequency, etc.), and input  
the appropriate signal.  
•Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
•Is volume set at minimum?  
•Adjust brightness on the menu.  
•Adjust volume.  
16  
14  
•Are the diagnostic lamps turned on?  
•Refer to “Self-diagnostic Indication,”  
and take an appropriate action.  
37  
The picture becomes •Is the signal RGB input?  
blurred.  
•Adjust DOT CLOCK and CLOCK  
PHASE using the menu.  
17  
•Is the RGB B connecting cord long?  
•Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
•Set the SYNC TERM. “LOW.”  
21  
16  
Color is abnormally  
dark or bright.  
•Adjust BRIGHT (brightness) using the  
menu.  
•Is picture quality (color density, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
•Adjust picture using the menu.  
16  
37  
20  
“TEMP. OVER” lights (or flashes) at the •Refer to “Self-diagnostic Indication,”  
right bottom of the screen.  
and take an appropriate action.  
Color is poor or  
unstable.  
•Is the correct broadcast system (color  
system) selected?  
•Set SIGNAL MODE (color system) to  
“AUTO.”  
•Are signals (scanning frequency, etc.) to •Check if the signal is appropriate  
connected devices appropriate?  
(scanning frequency, etc.), and input  
the appropriate signal.  
10  
29, 30  
17  
Color is suddenly  
reversed or whitened.  
•Is the Color-Reverse/Refresh timer  
activated?  
•Set “COLOR-REVERSE”/“REFRESH”  
to “OFF” on the menu.  
The picture is cut or  
shifted toward one  
side.  
•Is the size or position of the screen  
adjusted properly?  
•Adjust H SIZE, V SIZE, H POSITION  
or V POSITION using the menu.  
The remote control  
does not work.  
•Are the batteries correctly set?  
•Are the batteries exhausted?  
•Insert batteries correctly, observing the  
polarities (ª and ·).  
8
8
•Replace with new batteries.  
•Remove any blocking object.  
•Is there any object blocking the path  
between the remote control and remote  
sensor?  
—
•Is the Monitor too far away from you? •Move toward the Monitor, then operate  
the remote control.  
—
23  
The buttons on the  
Monitor do not work.  
•Is the Control Lock function in use?  
•Set the Control Lock function to “OFF”  
using the menu.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the trouble still persists, follow the procedure below:  
Self-diagnostic Indication  
When something abnormal occurs with the Monitor, this  
function informs you of the condition of the Monitor with  
self-diagnostic lamps, allowing for smooth service work.  
1 Check which lamps are lighting or flashing.  
On the Self-diagnostic Report Sheet (below), check the box  
next to “Lights” or “Flashes” of the corresponding lamp or  
lamps.  
Remote sensor  
•
Only one lamp may light or flash, or all three lamps  
may do so.  
1
2
3
2 Switch off the POWER switch on the back of the  
Monitor.  
Power lamp  
Self-diagnostic lamps (1 to 3)  
M
E
N
U
I
N
P
U
T
3 Unplug the power cord.  
4 Call your dealer and tell which lamps are lighting  
or flashing. (Copy and fax the Self-diagnostic  
Report Sheet below.)  
❑If the screen monitor turns off and self-diagnostic  
lamps light or flash  
If the self-diagnostic lamps light or flash in red, check the  
following before consulting the dealer where you  
purchased the Monitor.  
Note:  
If you switch on the main power immediately after switching  
it off (or after recovering from a brief power interruption), the  
self-diagnostic lamps may light (or flash), and no image may  
appear on the screen. In this case, switch off the main power  
again, wait for about 10 seconds, then switch it on again. If no  
self-diagnostic lamps light or flash, you can operate and use  
the Monitor as usual.  
• If self-diagnostic lamp 1 (upper) flashes, lamp 2 (middle)  
lights, and lamp 3 (lower) flashes  
This may be caused by the dusty intakes on the rear. If  
this happens, switch off the main power by POWER  
switch (set to “‡ (off)”), unplug the AC power cord,  
then clean the intakes by referring to the instruction on  
page 2.  
– After cleaning, switch on the Monitor’s main power  
again. If self-diagnostic lamps do not go off, consult  
your dealer immediately.  
Self-diagnostic Report Sheet  
❑If the screen monitor dims a little and “TEMP. OVER”  
lights (or flashes)  
If “TEMP. OVER” lights or flashes at the right bottom of the  
screen, check the following before consulting the dealer  
where you purchased the Monitor.  
Store name where you purchased the Monitor  
To  
Model Name:  
“TEMP. OVER” appears to warn you of the internal heat  
buildup, which is usually caused by accumulated dust  
around the intakes or by improper installation. If the cause  
of the internal heat buildup is eliminated, this indication  
disappears and the screen recovers the brightness.  
• If “TEMP. OVER” flashes in yellow  
Plasma Display Monitor  
GM-X50E  
The self-diagnostic lamps light or flash as listed on the  
following table. Please give me immediate advice or service if  
necessary.  
This may be caused by the dusty intakes on the rear. If  
this happens, switch off the main power by POWER  
switch (set to “‡ (off)”), unplug the AC power cord,  
then clean the intakes by referring to the instruction on  
page 2.  
Self-diagnostic lamps  
NO. Lamp position  
Conditions  
– After cleaning, switch on the Monitor’s main power  
again. If “TEMP. OVER” still flashes, this trouble may  
be caused by improper installation or improper  
location of the Monitor. In this case, consult your  
dealer immediately to solve this improper  
1
2
3
Upper  
Middle  
Lower  
& Lights  
& Flashes  
& Flashes  
& Lights  
& Lights  
& Flashes  
& Flashes  
installation and to improve the circumstances around  
the Monitor.  
• If “TEMP. OVER” lights in red  
TEMP. OVER  
& Lights  
“TEMP. OVER” will be shown for abut two minutes, the  
Monitor will shut off automatically, then the Self-  
diagonal lamps light in red. If this happens, switch off  
the main power by POWER switch (set to “‡ (off)”),  
unplug the AC power cord, then consult your dealer  
immediately.  
Your Name:  
Telephone No.:  
Address:  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Model name  
GM-X50E  
Frame color  
Silver  
Screen size  
Type 50 wide format  
16:9 (Wide format)  
1366 (H) x 768 (V)  
Aspect ratio  
Number of pixels displayed  
Number of colors displayed  
16.77 million (256 colors for each of RGB)  
110.7 cm x 62.2 cm, 127 cm  
Effective screen size  
(W x H, Diagonally)  
Weight  
50 kg  
External dimensions  
(W x H x D)  
123.2 cm x 74.3 cm x 10.3 cm  
* Excluding protruding parts  
Power requirements  
Rated input current  
AC 220 – 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
2.2 A  
Compatible systems  
VIDEO A, VIDEO B input  
NTSC, NTSC 4.43, PAL, PAL 60, SECAM  
COMPONENT input  
Audio power output  
480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), 1080/50i  
SPEAKER OUT: 6 Ω to 8 Ω  
3 W + 3 W (TYP at impedance 6 Ω)  
Operating conditions  
Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C  
Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % (non-condensation)  
(Slightly variable depending on ambient conditions for installation.)  
VIDEO A  
Video input  
BNC terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
BNC terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Video output  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
VIDEO B  
Y/C input  
Y/C terminal x 1  
Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
C: 0.286 V(p-p), 75 Ω (for NTSC)  
C: 0.3 V(p-p), 75 Ω (for PAL/SECAM)  
Video input  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
COMPONENT/RGB B *  
COMPONENT input  
BNC terminal x 3  
Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
PB/B-Y: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
PR/R-Y: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
B: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
RGB input  
BNC terminal x 5  
Analog RGB:  
R: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G on sync: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω (negative sync)  
Horizontal sync/Composite sync (HD/Cs):  
HD: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Cs: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Vertical sync (VD):  
VD: 1 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R) 500 mV(rms), high impedance  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RGB A  
RGB input  
D-sub 3-row 15-pin terminal x 1,  
Video signal: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G on sync: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω (negative sync)  
Horizontal sync/Composite sync (HD/Cs):  
HD: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Cs: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Vertical sync (VD):  
VD: 1 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Audio input  
Stereo mini jack terminal x 1  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
REMOTE terminals  
RS-232C: D-sub 9-pin terminal x 1  
MAKE: Mini DIN 4 pin  
WIRED: Stereo mini jack terminal x 1  
OPTION terminal  
Used exclusively for JVC's optional parts  
AUDIO OUT terminals  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
Output impedance 600 Ω  
SPEAKER OUT (L/R) terminals  
Impedance 6 Ω to 8 Ω  
* To use the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals either as the COMPONENT input terminal or as the RGB B input terminal, you  
need to set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly (see page 20).  
• For easy understanding, pictures and illustrations are shown by being emphasized, omitted or composed, and may be more or  
less different from actual products.  
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Macintosh is registered  
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only, and may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
Options (not supplied)  
Stand Unit  
TS-CL01SG, TS-CL02SG  
Wall Mounting Unit  
Ceiling Suspension Unit  
Cooling Fan Unit  
Speaker Unit  
TS-C420P2W, TS-C420P6W, TS-C420P8W, TS-C420P9W  
TS-C420P3W  
TS-C01FANG  
TS-C500SPG  
• Consult your dealer to see if other options are available.  
Notice on transportation  
This Monitor is precision equipment and needs dedicated packing material for transportation.  
Never use any packing material supplied from other than JVC or JVC-authorized dealers.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
(Continued)  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals)  
• RS-232C terminal  
This is a female type connector.  
• Y/C terminal  
4
3
5
2
1
Pin number Signal name  
Pin number Signal name  
3
1
4
2
Pin number Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
DCD  
RD  
6
7
8
9
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
1
2
3
4
GND (Y)  
GND (C)  
TD  
Y
C
DTR  
GND  
8
6
9
7
• MAKE terminal  
• RGB Input Terminal  
6
Pin number Signal name  
Pin number Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Red  
Green  
Blue  
9
10  
N/C  
GND  
GND  
N/C  
7
3
1
4
2
Pin number Signal name  
11  
1
2
3
4
GND  
GND  
SW2  
SW1  
1
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
8
N/C  
12  
3
4
5
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
13  
HD/Cs  
VD  
14  
15  
9
10  
15  
N/C  
External  
GND  
Dimensions  
Top view  
Side view  
Front view  
1232  
1125  
1107  
103  
35.5  
MENU INPUT  
Unit: mm  
1.5  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0304MKH-MW-MU  
PLASMA DISPLAY MONITOR  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG : PLASMABILDSCHIRM  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS : MONITEUR DE VISUALISATION PLASMA  
MANUALE D’ISTRUZIONI : MONITOR CON SCHERMO AL PLASMA  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES : MONITOR DISPLAY DE PLASMA  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GM-X50S  
MENU INPUT  
LCT1603-001A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
Model  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC Monitor.  
Before using the monitor, read this manual carefully so  
that you know how to use the Monitor correctly.  
Refer to this manual whenever questions or problems  
about operation arise. Be sure to read and observe the  
safety precautions.  
GM-X50S  
Keep this manual where the user can see it easily.  
* Installation and removal require special expertise.  
Consult your product dealer for details.  
Contents  
Page  
Other Convenient Functions ................................... 22  
• Showing On-screen Display .............................. 22  
• Showing the On-screen When Changing  
the Input Mode .................................................. 23  
• Prohibiting the Monitor’s Button Operations...... 23  
• Setting the Remote-Controllable Input .............. 24  
• Setting the High-Definition Signal Types ........... 24  
• Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan .. 25  
• Adjusting the White Balance ............................. 25  
• Setting the Clock and the Power On/Off  
Timer ................................................................. 26  
• Using the Pixel Shift Function ........................... 28  
• Using the Power Save Function ........................ 28  
• Preventing the Afterimage Effect ...................... 28  
• Refreshing the Screen ...................................... 29  
• Resetting All the Setup Menu Settings ............. 30  
• Resetting All the Menu Settings ........................ 31  
• Confirming the Use Time and Model Information ... 31  
Page  
Safety Precautions .................................................... 2  
Parts Identification .................................................... 4  
• Monitor: Front View ............................................. 4  
• Monitor: Rear Views 1........................................ 5  
• Monitor: Rear Views 2........................................ 6  
• Remote Control ................................................... 7  
Preparations.............................................................. 8  
• Checking the Accessories................................... 8  
• Installing the Batteries......................................... 8  
• About the Supplied Ferrite Core ......................... 8  
Installation ................................................................. 9  
• Precautions ......................................................... 9  
Connections ............................................................ 10  
• Precautions ....................................................... 10  
• Available Signals ............................................... 10  
• Connection Diagrams ....................................... 11  
• Connecting an External Control Unit................. 12  
• External Speaker Connection ........................... 13  
• Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit ........ 13  
Menu Classifications ............................................... 32  
• Main Menu ........................................................ 32  
• Setup Menu....................................................... 34  
Basic Operations..................................................... 14  
• Daily Operations ............................................... 14  
• Changing the Aspect Ratio ............................... 15  
Troubleshooting ....................................................... 36  
• Self-diagnostic Indication .................................. 37  
Video Adjustments .................................................. 16  
• Adjusting the Picture Quality ............................. 16  
• Adjusting the Screen Size and Position ............ 17  
• Adjusting the Color Temperature....................... 19  
• Changing the Aspect Ratio ............................... 19  
• Setting the Receivable Signal Types ................. 20  
• Setting the COMPONENT/RGB B Input ........... 20  
• Changing the Resistance of the RGB B Input  
Terminals........................................................... 21  
• Resetting the Function Selection Menu Settings .... 21  
Specifications .......................................................... 38  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
EUROPE EMC STANDARD NOTICE  
Warning: This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the  
user may be required to take adequate measure.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION  
WARNING:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO  
OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE  
APPARATUS.  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This unit has been engineered and manufactured to assure  
your personal safety. But IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE  
HAZARD. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated into this product, observe the following basic rules for  
its installation, use and service. Please read these “Important Safeguards” carefully before use.  
– All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.  
– The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.  
– All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.  
– All operating instructions should be followed.  
– Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp  
cloth for cleaning.  
– Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust around the intakes (all the  
openings) on the rear. If a vacuum is not available, use a cloth and wipe it off.  
Failure to do so will cause internal heat buildup and, therefore, cause damage  
to the product.  
– Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as  
they may be hazardous.  
– Do not use this product near water. Do not use immediately after moving from  
a low temperature to high temperature, as this causes condensation, which  
may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
– Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or  
adult, and serious damage to the product. The product should be mounted according to the manufacturer’s instructions,  
and should use a mount recommended by the manufacturer.  
– When the product is used on a cart, care should be taken to avoid quick stops, excessive force, and  
uneven surfaces which may cause the product and cart to overturn, damaging equipment or causing  
possible injury to the operator.  
– Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. These ensure reliable operation of the  
product and protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. (The openings  
should never be blocked by placing the product on bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface. It should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided and the manufacturer’s instructions have  
been adhered to.)  
For proper ventilation, separate the product from other equipment, which may prevent ventilation and keep distance  
more than 10 cm.  
– This product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the  
type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– For United Kingdom: This product is equipped with a three-wire plug. This plug will fit only into a grounded power outlet.  
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the grounded plug.  
– Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or  
against them.Pay particular attention to cords at doors, plugs, receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.  
– For added protection of this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods  
of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power line surges.  
– Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or convenience receptacles on other equipment as this can result in a  
risk of fire or electric shock.  
– Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short  
out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
– Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages  
and other hazards. Refer all service to qualified service personnel.  
– Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer service to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:  
a)When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b)If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen on the product.  
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d)If the product operated normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered  
by the Operation Manual, as an improper adjustment of controls may result in damage and will often require  
extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
e)If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this indicates a need for service.  
– When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the  
manufacturer or with same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric  
shock, or other hazards.  
– Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper operating condition.  
– The product should be placed more than 30 cm away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, and  
other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
– When connecting other products such as VCR’s, and personal computers, you should turn off the power of this product  
for protection against electric shock.  
– Do not place combustibles behind the cooling fan. For example, cloth, paper, matches, aerosol cans or gas lighters that  
present special hazards when over heated.  
– Use only the accessory cord designed for this product to prevent shock.  
–
Option terminal: This terminal is intended exclusively to be used to drive the fan motor.  
Do not connect any plugs to the terminal other than JVC’s recommended optional parts.  
Polarity of terminal  
POWER CONNECTION  
The power supply voltage rating of this product is AC 220 – 240 V.  
The power cords attached conform to the following power supply  
voltage and countries. Use only the power cord designated to ensure  
Safety and EMC regulations of each country.  
For European countries:  
AC 220 – 240 V  
For United Kingdom:  
AC 220 – 240 V  
Note for the United Kingdom power cord only  
The plug on the United Kingdom power cord has a built-in fuse.  
When replacing the fuse, be sure to use only a correctly rated  
approved type, re-fit the fuse cover. (Consult your dealer or qualified  
service personnel.)  
For Australia:  
AC 220 – 240 V  
How to replace the fuse  
Open the fuse  
compartment with the  
blade screw driver, and  
replace the fuse.  
Fuse  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts Identification  
Monitor: Front View  
1
2
MENU INPUT  
MENU INPUT  
Bottom View  
3
4
5
6
1 Remote sensor/power lamp  
5 INPUT button (page 14)  
Point the front end of the wireless remote control toward  
here.  
When the Monitor is turned on, the power lamp glows  
green. It glows orange in standby mode.  
Use this button to switch between inputs.  
To select the COMPONENT or RGB B input, you have to  
set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly on the menu (see page  
20).  
2 Self-diagnostic lamps (page 37)  
These lamps light/flash if something abnormal occurs  
with the Monitor.  
6
button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn on and off (on standby) the  
Monitor when the POWER switch on the rear of the  
Monitor is “| (on).”  
3 2 / 3 / 5 / ∞ buttons  
Use these buttons to select menu items and to make  
adjustments.  
• When no menu is displayed, you can use the 2 / 3  
buttons to adjust the volume level.  
4 MENU button  
Use this button to display or erase menus.  
While a sub-menu is displayed, pressing this button will  
move you one screen back to the preceding menu.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitor: Rear Views 1  
1
2
3
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
R
R
R
Y/G  
Pb/B  
Pr/R  
HD/Cs  
VD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Y/C IN  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
COMPONENT/RGB B  
1 VIDEO A terminals (page 11)  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
3 COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals (page 11)  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
Connect these terminals to the audio output terminals of  
the other equipment.  
Connect these terminals to the audio input terminals of a  
VCR, etc.  
VIDEO IN terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
G, B, R, HD/Cs, VD (VIDEO) input terminals (BNC)  
Connect these terminals to the following output terminals  
of a personal computer or other equipment:  
– Analog RGB signal output terminals  
– Horizontal sync (HD) signal or composite (Cs) signal  
output terminal  
VIDEO OUT terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the video input terminal of  
another monitor, etc.  
– Vertical sync (VD) signal output terminal  
Note:  
Notes:  
• Since the video output terminals on this Monitor are  
loop-through terminals, the devices connected to this  
video output terminal should be correctly terminated.  
Otherwise, pictures become abnormally bright or the  
Monitor screen gets affected abnormally.  
• External sync signals are automatically detected when  
they come in.  
• When both horizontal (HD)/vertical (VD) sync and  
composite (Cs) sync are connected, HD/VD sync signals  
will be used.  
2 VIDEO B terminals (page 11)  
Y, Pb, Pr (VIDEO) input terminals (BNC)  
Connect these terminals to the component signal output  
terminals of NTSC or high-vision equipment.  
AUDIO (L/MONO, R) input terminals (pin jack)  
Connect these terminals to the audio output terminals of a  
VCR, etc.  
Y/C (S video) IN terminal (mini DIN, 4pin)  
Connect this terminal to the S-video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
Note:  
• When these terminals are used as the component  
terminals (Y, Pb, Pr)—see “Setting the COMPONENT/  
RGB B Input” on page 20, external sync signals (HD/Cs,  
VD) cannot be used.  
VIDEO IN terminal (pin jack)  
Connect this terminal to the video output terminal of a  
VCR, etc.  
Note:  
• When both the video and S-video terminals are  
connected, the S-video terminal will have priority.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts Identification  
(Continued)  
Monitor: Rear Views 2  
1
2
3
OPTION  
SPEAKER OUT  
R
L
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
4
5
6
7
8
OUT  
AUDIO  
L
MAKE  
R
IN  
RS-232C  
REMOTE  
WIRED  
POWER  
RGB A  
AUDIO  
AC IN  
1 OPTION terminal (page 13)  
5 REMOTE terminals (page 12)  
Connect the power cord of the Cooling Fan Unit (not  
supplied) when installing the Monitor vertically.  
RS-232C terminal (D-sub, 9 pin)  
Connect to the RS-232C terminal of a personal computer.  
For the control method using this terminal, consult an  
authorized JVC dealer.  
2 SPEAKER OUT L/R terminals (page 13)  
Connect external speakers, such as unique JVC speakers  
(not supplied), etc.  
MAKE terminal (mini DIN, 4pin)  
Connect an external control unit. (See page 12.)  
WIRED terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect a wired remote control unit to this terminal.  
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL (built-in speaker/external  
speaker) selecting switch (page 13)  
INTERNAL:  
EXTERNAL:  
To use built-in speakers.  
To use external speakers.  
Note:  
• When the above three terminals are used at the same  
time, transmitted commands through the MAKE  
terminal have priority over those through the other  
terminals.  
4 RGB A input terminals (page 12)  
Input terminal (D-sub, 15 pin)  
Connect to the video output terminal of a personal  
computer.  
6 AUDIO OUT terminals (pin jack) (page 12)  
Connect to the audio input terminals of external  
equipment such as an amplifier.  
Note:  
• Use a cord as short as possible when connecting a  
personal computer to this terminal. (Recommended  
length is within 3 m.)  
7 AC IN terminal (page 12)  
Connect the supplied power cord to this terminal.  
AUDIO IN terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect to the audio output terminal of a personal  
computer.  
8 POWER switch (page 14)  
When this switch is set to “| (on),” you can turn on and  
off (on standby) the Monitor by using the POWER button  
on the remote control or the  
button on the Monitor.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control  
1
2
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
3
4
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
INPUT SELECT  
9
p
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
INPUT SELECT  
RGB A  
COMPO.  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
A
/(RGB B)  
5
6
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
MENU/EXIT  
7
8
MENU/EXIT  
1 Remote control cable jack (page 12)  
7 2 / 3 / 5 / ∞ buttons  
Connect the remote control cable (not supplied) when  
using this remote control as a wired remote control.  
Use these buttons to select menu items or make  
adjustments.  
2 Remote signal transmission window  
8 MENU/EXIT button  
Use this button to display or erase menus.  
While a sub-menu is displayed, pressing this button will  
move you one screen back to the preceding menu.  
3 POWER ON/OFF button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn on and off (on standby) the  
Monitor when the POWER switch on the rear of the  
Monitor is “| (on).”  
9 ASPECT button (page 15)  
Use this button to switch between aspect ratios. Each time  
you press the button, the aspect ratio changes as follows:  
4 DISPLAY button (page 14)  
Use this button to display the input terminal, color system  
(for VIDEO A or VIDEO B input), scan system (for  
COMPONENT input) and horizontal/vertical frequency  
(for RGB A and RGB B input).  
REGULAR  
FULL  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
p VOLUME + / – buttons (page 14)  
5 INPUT SELECT (VIDEO A, VIDEO B, COMPO./(RGB B) and  
RGB A) buttons  
Use these buttons to adjust the volume level.  
(page 14)  
Use these buttons to switch between inputs.  
To select the COMPONENT or RGB B input, you have to  
set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly on the menu (see page  
20).  
6 MUTING button (page 14)  
Use this button to turn off the volume immediately.  
Pressing the button again will resume the previous  
volume level.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparations  
Checking the Accessories  
The following accessories are included with the Monitor. Check for them. If any item is missing, please contact the dealer where  
you purchased the Monitor.  
• Remote control (RM-C579) x 1  
• Power cord x 2 (3 for Australia) (Use the one matching the wall outlet.)  
• Batteries (AA/R6P) x 2  
• BNC-RCA convension plug x 3 (For Australia)  
• Ferrite core x 2  
Installing the Batteries  
Put the batteries in the remote control as follows. If the remote control has become erratic in operation, change the batteries.  
1 Remove the back cover.  
While pushing the release lever on the cover, remove the cover in  
the direction of the arrow.  
2 Place the batteries.  
Put the two supplied batteries (AA/R6P), noting the ª and ·  
markings, as shown.  
3 Replace the back cover as illustrated.  
Make sure the release lever on the cover is locked in place correctly.  
Precautions for using batteries  
If batteries are used improperly, the liquid could leak out, causing a fire, injury, etc. or dirtying the vicinity.  
Take notice of the following:  
• Do not mix old and new batteries.  
• Do not mix different types of battery as different types may have different characteristics.  
• Place the batteries according to the ª and · markings indicated on the battery compartment.  
• When installing the batteries, insert the · end first to avoid a short circuit.  
• Use only the specified batteries.  
• When you are not using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.  
• When the batteries have reached the end of their life, replace them with new ones  
immediately. Otherwise, the liquid may leak out, or malfunction may be caused by  
the leaked liquid. If the leaked liquid contacts your skin, wipe off the liquid with a  
soft cloth. If the affected skin is left as is, you may get a rough skin.  
• Do not throw the batteries into fire or try recharging them.  
The instruction below applies  
only to the use in Holland.  
Gebruike batterijen:  
• The service life of batteries is six months to one year for normal use. The supplied  
batteries are only for checking the operation and their life may be shorter. When  
the remote control operation becomes erratic, replace with new batteries.  
About the Supplied Ferrite Core  
Be sure to attach the supplied ferrite cores to the speaker cords when using external speakers to reduce interference from the  
Monitor with external devices. See page 13.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Precautions  
• When installing the Monitor vertically, make sure the following:  
–Attach the external cooling fan unit to the Monitor. (See “Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit“ on page 13.)  
–Set the speed of the internal cooling fan to “HIGH.” (See “Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan“ on page 25.)  
• When installing the Monitor, be sure to use a dedicated Stand Unit, Wall Mounting Unit, or Monitor Hanger Unit, depending  
on a particular case. Ask your dealer for installation.  
• When installing the Monitor in a special way (for example, installing it diagonally), consult your dealer.  
• Route the power cord and connection cables along wall or floor corners to avoid walking on them.  
• For good heat dissipation, try to leave the following distances of space (minimum) around the Monitor.  
• The ambient temperature of the installation place should be within the range of 0˚C to 40˚C (slightly variable depending on  
ambient conditions for installation.)  
• When installing the Monitor in a place, such as near the ceiling, the remote control may not work correctly because of possible  
effects from the surroundings. If this happens, use the remote control as a wired remote control or move the Monitor where it  
is free from these effects.  
When installing the Monitor on a stand  
Front View  
Side View  
200  
Wall  
50  
150  
150  
MENU INPUT  
50  
Unit: mm  
Take measures against the Monitor from overturning:  
To protect against abnormal events such as earthquakes and to prevent unexpected accidents, take appropriate measures  
for preventing the Monitor from overturning; should it overturn, this could lead to personal injury.  
For detailed information, refer to the manual supplied for the stand.  
When mounting the Monitor on the wall  
When hanging the Monitor from the ceiling  
Front View  
Side View  
Side View  
50  
200  
200  
100  
100  
MENU INPUT  
50  
Unit: mm  
100  
Unit: mm  
Notes:  
• Do not allow the same image (pattern) to be continuously displayed on the screen for a long time; otherwise, the area on the  
screen corresponding to the image may vary in brightness, leaving an afterimage on the screen. To reduce the afterimage, you  
can use the Color Reverse function and the Refresh function (see pages 28 and 29).  
• The Monitor is manufactured using very high-precision technology, allowing for more than 99.99% active pixels, however, be  
aware that only a slight number of pixels may be deficient or lit at all times.  
• Do not install the Monitor in such a way that the Monitor and other AV equipment affect each other adversely. (For example,  
if a disturbed image or noise due to electromagnetic interference occurs, or if the infrared remote control malfunctions, change  
the installation place.)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Precautions  
• Before making connections, turn off all the equipment.  
• Use a cord whose plugs are correctly matching for the terminals on this Monitor and the equipment.  
• Plugs should be firmly inserted; poor connection could cause noise.  
• To unplug a cord, be sure to grasp its plug and pull it out.  
• Connect the power cord after having finished all other connections.  
• Refer also to the user manual of each piece of equipment.  
Available Signals  
Video signals  
The following signals can be input to this Monitor:  
• VIDEO A and VIDEO B terminals accept — PAL, PAL60, NTSC, NTSC 4.43, and SECAM signals.  
• COMPONENT/RGB B terminals accept — 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), and 1080/50i signals.  
(You need to set “COMPO./RGB B” to “COMPO.” on the menu (see page 20).  
Computer signals (Preset)  
This Monitor has 27 preset video modes for the most popular industrial standard, and the signals of the following image  
resolutions can be input to the RGB input terminals.  
Screen resolution  
Horizontal  
Horizontal  
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)  
Vertical  
No.  
Signal name  
Scan system  
Vertical  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PC98  
640  
640  
640  
852  
640  
640  
800  
800  
800  
400  
400  
480  
480  
480  
480  
600  
600  
600  
600  
768  
768  
768  
768  
768  
864  
1024  
1024  
1200  
1200  
1200  
480  
624  
768  
870  
—
24.8  
31.5  
31.5  
31.7  
37.9  
37.5  
35.2  
37.9  
48.1  
46.9  
48.4  
48.4  
56.5  
60.0  
68.7  
67.5  
64.0  
80.0  
75.0  
81.3  
87.5  
35.0  
49.7  
60.2  
68.7  
15.7  
15.6  
56.4  
70.1  
59.9  
60.3  
72.8  
75.0  
56.3  
60.3  
72.2  
75.0  
60.0  
60.0  
70.1  
75.0  
85.0  
75.0  
60.0  
75.0  
60.0  
65.0  
70.0  
66.7  
74.6  
74.9  
75.1  
59.9  
50.0  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Non-interlace  
Interlace  
VGA400-70  
VGA480-60  
WVGA-60  
VGA480-72  
VGA480-75  
SVGA-56  
SVGA-60  
SVGA-72  
SVGA-75  
XGA-60  
10  
800  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
1024  
1366  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1152  
1280  
1280  
1600  
1600  
1600  
640  
WXGA-60  
XGA-70  
XGA-75  
XGA-85  
XGA+-75  
SXGA-60  
SXGA-75  
UXGA-60  
UXGA-65  
UXGA-70  
MAC13”  
MAC16”  
MAC19”  
MAC21”  
RGB15K-60  
RGB15K-50  
832  
1024  
1152  
—
—
—
Interlace  
Notes:  
• When a signal other than listed above is input, a part of the screen may become void or an unnecessary picture may appear.  
• Signals, though they are within the acceptable range of frequencies, may not be displayed normally, depending on the signal  
type.  
• Depending on the connected equipment, the Monitor may not be compatible with composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signals.  
• When a preset mode signal is input, the vertical frequency displayed on the screen will have an “*” shown at its right top  
position.  
• When the No. 4 and No. 12 signals are input, change the aspect ratio to “FULL” with the ASPECT button (page 15) on the  
remote control or from the “FUNCTION SELECT” menu (see page 19).  
• When No. 16 to No. 21 and No. 25 signals are input, thin lines may become obscure for their signal frequencies are higher  
than the screen resolution. Using the RGB A input terminals makes the lines clearer than using the RGB B input terminals.  
• The adjustment of the screen size and position is the setting common to the No. 14 and No. 24 signals. If you use both signals  
by switching them, the adjustment of either signal may not be proper.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection Diagrams  
AV connections  
VCR 1  
DVD player, etc.  
VCR 2  
(used as the playback source)  
(used as the playback source)  
(used as the playback source)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
L/MONO  
R
R
R
Y/G  
Pb/B  
Pr/R  
HD/Cs  
VD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Y/C IN  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
COMPONENT/RGB B  
When connecting another PC to the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals, set the “COMPO./RGB B” setting to  
“RGB B” (see page 20).  
To audio output  
To G output  
To B output  
Personal computer  
To R output  
(used as the playback  
source)  
To HD/Cs output  
To VD output  
Notes:  
• You can connect another VCR or Monitor to the VIDEO A OUT terminal. However, when connecting a VCR to the  
VIDEO A terminals, do not connect both IN and OUT terminals to the same VCR.  
• When connecting a VCR to the VIDEO B terminals, you can use either the video or S-video terminals. If the both  
terminals are used, S-video terminal will have priority.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
(Continued)  
Typical connections  
❊ For connection, see “Connecting an  
External Control Unit” below.  
Personal computer  
Personal computer  
Remote control  
(used to control the Monitor)  
(used as the playback source)  
(supplied)  
M E N U / E X I T  
Amplifier, etc.  
O
V L U M E  
M U T I N G  
V I D E O  
A B G  
B
A
R
B )  
.
/ ( R C G O B M P O  
I N P U T S E L E C T  
A S P E C T  
Y
D I S P L A  
O F F  
O N  
W E  
P R O  
U N I T O L  
C O N  
T
T
E
R
R E M O  
R M – C 5 7 9  
Cable with stereo  
mini jacks  
(not supplied)  
Power cord (supplied)  
❊
To a wall outlet  
OUT  
AUDIO  
IN  
L
MAKE  
R
RS-232C  
WIRED  
REMOTE  
RGB A  
AUDIO  
AC IN  
POWER  
Connecting an External Control Unit  
When connecting the external control unit to the MAKE terminal, you can operate the following functions through the MAKE  
terminal;  
• Turn on or off the Monitor.  
Preparation: The POWER switch on the rear must be set to “| (on)” (so that the Monitor is in standby mode).  
• Select the input.  
Preparation: “REMOTE SWITCH” should be set correctly to select your desired input (see page 24).  
Notes:  
• There is no remote control on/off switch. When a plug is inserted to the MAKE terminal, remote control through the external  
control unit is automatically activated.  
• When the other REMOTE terminals are used at the same time, transmitted commands through the MAKE terminal have  
priority over those through the other terminals.  
• MAKE terminal  
• External control unit  
Pin number Signal name  
Signals  
transmitted  
6
4
2
5
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
GND  
TTL level  
SW2  
=
=
=
H: Power Off  
H: Input A*  
L: Power On  
SW1  
L: Input B*  
SW DET  
GND  
H: Not connected  
L: Connected  
*
Input A and Input B will be determined by the “REMOTE  
SWITCH” setting.  
IMPORTANT:  
External control unit is not commercially available in the market. When you need it, consult your dealer.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External Speaker Connection  
External speakers  
(Ex. TS-C500SPG)  
Note:  
It is recommended to use the  
speaker unit—TS-C500SPG  
(not supplied) as the external  
speakers. You can also  
connect any speakers of the  
following specifications:  
• Impedance: Between 6 Ω  
and 8 Ω  
When using external  
speakers, set this to  
EXTERNAL.  
• Power handling capacity:  
More than 3 W  
To speaker  
To speaker  
input terminals  
input terminals  
Ferrite core (supplied)  
How to connect the cords  
Attach the supplied ferrite cores to the speaker cords when using external speakers.  
Attach the ferrite cores as near to the SPEAKER OUT L/R terminals on the rear panel  
of the Monitor as possible.  
How to attach the ferrite core  
Caution:  
• Do not short-circuit the 9 and (  
speaker cords each other. (Refer also to  
the instructions supplied with the  
speaker unit when connecting  
speakers.)  
Connecting the External Cooling Fan Unit  
When installing this Monitor vertically, it is  
required to attach the external cooling fan  
unit (not supplied).  
Notes:  
• When installing this Monitor vertically, it is  
also required to set the speed of the internal  
cooling fan to “HIGH” (see page 25).  
• If you install the Monitor in such a way not  
instructed in this manual (for example,  
installing it diagonally), the cooling fan unit  
may not be able to cool down the internal  
heat enough to make the Monitor operate;  
therefore, reinstallation or another method  
for cooling will be required. Consult your  
dealer in such a case.  
Cooling Fan Unit:  
TS-C01FANG  
(not supplied)  
ACIN  
L
R
OTU  
ADUIO  
MKAE  
WRIED  
R-S32C  
ROMTE  
OTPINO  
RBGA  
ADUIO  
IN  
• For more detailed connection, refer to the  
manual supplied with the external cooling  
fan unit.  
Cooling Fan Unit:  
TS-C01FANG  
(not supplied)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Daily Operations  
1 Turn on the main power.  
Set the POWER switch on the rear of the Monitor to “|  
(on)”.  
Rear View  
The power lamp on the upper left of the front panel  
lights orange.  
• If you have turned off the Monitor not by using  
POWER ON on the remote control (or  
on the front  
panel), but by using the POWER switch, setting the  
power switch to “| (on)” lights the power lamp green  
and turns the Monitor on.  
2 Turn on the power.  
Press POWER ON on the remote control to turn the power  
on.  
The power lamp lights green.  
• You can also use  
turn on the Monitor.  
on the front panel (lower right) to  
1
3 Select an input.  
Select the desired input by pressing INPUT SELECT  
(VIDEO A, VIDEO B, COMPO./(RGB B) and RGB A).  
• You can also select the input by pressing INPUT on the  
Monitor. Each time you press the button, the input  
mode changes in sequence.  
POWER  
VIDEO A  
VIDEO B  
RGB A  
COMPONENT or RGB B  
Ex. When selecting “VIDEO A” input  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Input selected  
Input video signal  
Note:  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
2
4
• To select “COMPONENT” or “RGB B,” you need to set the  
“COMPO./RGB B” setting correctly.  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
DISPLAY  
INPUT SELECT  
4 Adjust the volume.  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
3
VIDEO  
B
:
10  
VOLUME  
+
–
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
Note:  
MUTING  
• While no menu is displayed, you can adjust the volume by  
pressing 2 / 3 on the Monitor.  
To turn off the volume immediately  
Press MUTING.  
“MUTING ON” is displayed, and the sound goes out.  
Pressing the button again resumes the previous volume level.  
MENU/EXIT  
To make the screen indication appear  
Press DISPLAY.  
The types of input and signal are indicated on the screen for  
about 3 seconds.  
You can also make the screen indication appear using menus  
(page 22).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
With this Monitor, you can select among three types of wide  
screens (FULL, ZOOM, and PANORAMIC) in addition to the  
REGULAR screen of conventional 4:3 aspect ratio.  
Press ASPECT to select the screen size.  
Each time you press the button, the screen size changes as  
follows:  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
REGULAR  
FULL  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
REGULAR:  
Displays at conventional 4:3 aspect ratio.  
ASPECT  
INPUT SELECT  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
FULL:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
horizontally.  
MENU/EXIT  
ZOOM:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
vertically and horizontally at the same ratio.  
PANORAMIC:  
REGULAR size display is enlarged  
horizontally to the extent that the picture  
does not look abnormally.  
Precautions for using the screen mode switching function  
• This Monitor features a screen mode switching (aspect ratio  
change) function. If you select a mode different in aspect  
ratio from software such as TV programs, the picture may  
look different from original picture. Be aware of this point  
when you are selecting a screen mode.  
• If you select a wide screen mode while viewing  
conventional video programs of the aspect ratio 4:3, some  
portions (edges) of the original picture will be cut off, or  
deformed. To enjoy the original picture as it is, select  
“REGULAR” while viewing such programs.  
• If you place the Monitor in a tea room, hotel, etc. for  
business purposes or public viewing and modify the picture  
by using the screen mode switching (aspect ratio change)  
function, this could violate the copyright protected by the  
copyright law, which requires your special attention.  
• If you make the screen very bright and watch programs  
selecting “REGULAR,” for a long period of time, the  
Monitor screen may happen to be burned in. If this occurs,  
watching programs using a wide screen mode for a while  
will reduce the burn-in gradually.  
Notes:  
• When one of the following signals is being input, you  
cannot select the aspect ratio you want.  
I 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can only select FULL.  
I When any signal other than RGB15K-60 and RGB15K-50  
through the RGB A or COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can select only REGULAR and FULL.  
• The aspect ratio can also be changed on the “FUNCTION  
SELECT” Menu (see page 19).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
Adjusting the Picture Quality  
Picture quality can be set for each input mode.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MENU INPUT  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
MENU INPUT  
“PICTURE ADJ.”  
3 Press 3 to display the Picture  
Adjustment Menu.  
VIDEO  
A
PICTURE ADJ.  
5
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
5 /  
MENU  
2 / 3  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
item you want to adjust.  
Item  
Adjustment  
range  
Standard  
(Reset)  
CONTRAST  
–20 to +20  
+10  
00  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
BRIGHT (brightness) –20 to +20  
1
*
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
CHROMA  
–20 to +20  
–20 to +20  
–10 to +10  
00  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
2
*
PHASE  
00  
INPUT SELECT  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
00  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
See “To make an adjustment  
while viewing the adjustment  
bar” on the next page.  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
reset  
See “To reset the adjustments” on  
the next page.  
1 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC, PAL, or SECAM  
signal, or component signal.  
*
2 / 3  
5 /  
5
2 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC signal or  
*
component signal.  
MENU/EXIT  
MENU/EXIT  
5 Press 2/3 to make adjustments.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
Adjusting the Screen Size and Position  
bar  
The screen size and position can be adjusted.  
Adjusted settings can be stored for each signal type; therefore,  
when the same signal comes in, the stored settings are  
recalled.  
After step 3 on page 16, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
• When adjusting the size, the size cannot be adjusted  
proportionally, but can be enlarged rightward (or  
downward) only and reduced leftward (or upward) only.  
Therefore, it is necessary to adjust both the size and position  
alternately to adjust to the appropriate size.  
The Sub Menu for CONTRAST appears on the screen.  
:+01  
CONTRAST  
+
–
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
MAIN MENU  
SHARPNESS  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SIZE/POSITION ADJ.”  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 16, proceed as follows:  
MAIN MENU  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
reset  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
3 Press 3 to display the Size/Position  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
Adjustment Menu.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
H
H
V
V
SIZE  
POSITION  
SIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
CLOCK PHASE  
sub menu  
reset  
*
00  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
* Appearing and being adjustable only when you use RGB A or  
RGB B input.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
(Continued)  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
bar  
item you want to adjust.  
After step 3 on page 17, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
The Sub Menu for H SIZE appears on the screen.  
Item  
Adjustment range  
H (horizontal) SIZE*1 –40 to +40  
H POSITION*1  
Varies depending on other  
:+01  
H
SIZE  
settings  
++  
+
+
V (vertical) SIZE*1  
V POSITION*1  
–40 to +40  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
Varies depending on other  
settings  
DOT CLOCK*2  
–10 to +10  
–20 to +20  
H SIZE  
H POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
V SIZE  
CLOCK PHASE*2  
CLOCK PHASE  
V POSITION  
sub menu  
reset  
See “To make an adjustment  
while viewing the adjustment  
bar” on the right column.  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
See “To reset the adjustments” on  
the right column.  
*1 Size and position adjustments are so related that if one  
is adjusted much, the other’s adjustable range will be  
reduced.  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 17, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
*2 DOT CLOCK is the function to adjust the pixel  
sampling number of the A/D converter to the  
resolution (the vertical pixel number) of the input  
signal.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
CLOCK PHASE is the function to adjust the sampling  
timing (phase) to the phase of the input signal.  
You can use the two functions to reduce flickering and  
blurring on the screen when using the RGB A or RGB  
B input.  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
5 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
Note:  
Note:  
• Adjustment values for both horizontal and vertical sizes of  
the screen are so related that if one is adjusted up to near  
the maximum value, the attainable value of the other will  
be decreased.  
• During size and position adjustments, the Monitor  
screen may be distorted. This is normal, but not a  
malfunction of the Monitor.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Color Temperature  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
The adjusted setting applies to all inputs.  
The setting adjusted applies to all inputs.  
• You can change the aspect ratio by pressing ASPECT. (See  
page 15.)  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
MAIN MENU  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
FUNCTION SELECT  
“ * ” appears  
Selection Menu.  
only when you  
have adjusted  
the White  
Balance (see  
the right  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
FUNCTION SELECT  
B
B
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
column).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
1
*
*1 *2 *3  
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
2
3
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
2
3
*
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“COLOR TEMP.”  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“ASPECT.”  
5 Press 2/3 to make an adjustment.  
Each time you press the button, the color temperature  
alternates between “HIGH” and “LOW.”  
5 Press 2/3 to select an aspect ratio you  
want.  
HIGH:  
LOW:  
To make the screen become bluish.  
To make the screen become reddish.  
Each time you press the button, the aspect ratio changes  
as follows:  
REGULAR  
FULL  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
PANORAMIC  
ZOOM  
* For detailed information on these aspect ratios, see  
page 15.  
Note:  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
• To make a fine adjustment, adjust “WHITE BALANCE” (see  
page 25).  
Note:  
• When one of the following signals is being input, you  
cannot select the aspect ratio you want.  
I 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
Aspect ratio is fixed to FULL (“ASPECT” does not appear  
on the display).  
I When any signal other than RGB15K-60 and RGB15K-50  
through the RGB A or COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals  
You can select only REGULAR and FULL.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Adjustments  
(Continued)  
Setting the Receivable Signal Types  
Setting the COMPONENT/RGB B Input  
You can set the receivable signal types. Normally, select  
“AUTO.”  
A common setting will apply to both the VIDEO A input and  
the VIDEO B input, and a different setting will apply to the  
COMPONENT input.  
After connecting the playback device such as a PC or a DVD  
player to the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals, you have to  
specify which type of signal comes into this terminal—RGB or  
component signals.  
• Without setting “COMPO./RGB B” correctly, you cannot  
show any picture though you select the COMPONENT or  
RGB B input.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
MAIN MENU  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
Selection Menu.  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
FUNCTION SELECT  
Selection Menu.  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
B
B
*1 *2 *3  
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
1
*
2
3
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
*
2
3
*
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“SIGNAL MODE.”  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
5 Press 2/3 to select the receivable video  
“COMPO./RGB B”  
signal type.  
Each time you press the button, the receivable video  
signal type changes as follows:  
5 Press 2/3 to select the type of signal.  
• When VIDEO A or VIDEO B input is selected:  
COMPO.: When connecting the playback device such as  
a DVD player, which can emit the component  
signals.  
AUTO  
PAL60  
NTSC  
N4.43  
PAL  
SECAM  
RGB B: When connecting the playback device such as  
(NTSC 4.43)  
a PC, which can emit the RGB signals.  
• When COMPONENT input is selected:  
The setting changes and the “FUNCTION SELECT”  
Menu disappears.  
AUTO  
480i  
576i  
480p  
576p  
1080/50i  
1080/60i  
(1035i)*  
720/50p  
720/60p  
* Changes according to the “HD SIGNAL MODE”  
setting (see page 24).  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Resistance of the RGB B  
Input Terminals  
Resetting the Function Selection Menu Settings  
You can reset all the Function Selection Menu settings at a  
time.  
You can set the resistance of the two of the RGB B input  
terminals to either HIGH (1 kΩ) or LOW (75 Ω):  
• HD/Cs (Horizontal sync/Composite) terminal  
• VD (Vertical sync) terminal.  
HIGH is the normal setting. Change the setting to LOW when  
you use a long connecting cord and the picture flickers and  
blurs on the screen.  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
FUNCTION SELECT  
“FUNCTION SELECT.”  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
B
B
3 Press 3 to display the Function  
Selection Menu.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
*1 *2 *3  
FUNCTION SELECT  
1
*
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
B
B
2
3
*
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
*1 *2 *3  
*
1
*
“ASPECT” does not appear when 720/60p, 720/50p,  
1080/60i (1035/60i), or 1080/50i signal is being input  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B input terminals.  
“SIGNAL MODE” appears only when VIDEO  
A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
2
3
*
“reset.”  
*
“SYNC TERM.” appears only when the RGB B  
input is selected.  
5 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
“SYNC TERM.”  
5 Press 2/3 to select the terminal  
resistance.  
6 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
Each time you press the button, the resistance alternates  
between “HIGH” and “LOW.”  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
HIGH:  
LOW:  
Initial setting. Normally select this.  
When using a long connecting cord and the  
picture flickering and blurring on the screen.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit the menu  
operations.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
Showing On-screen Display  
The input mode and signal type will be indicated on the  
screen.  
• You can also show these information by pressing DISPLAY  
on the remote control. (See page 14.)  
1 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) to display the Main Menu.  
MENU INPUT  
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
Cursor (3)  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
MENU INPUT  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“STATUS DISPLAY.”  
3 Press 3 to display the current input  
5
5 /  
MENU  
2 / 3  
terminal and received signal type.  
Ex. When selecting “VIDEO A” or “VIDEO B” input  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
Input selected  
Input Video signal  
type  
Ex. When selecting “COMPONENT” input  
COMPONENT  
480i  
RM–C579 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Ex. When selecting “RGB A” or “RGB B” input  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
RGB  
B
(BNC)  
60.3Hz*  
37.9kHz  
DISPLAY  
ASPECT  
When the signal being input is a preset video  
mode, an “*” will be shown after the  
frequency.  
INPUT SELECT  
COMPO.  
A
/(RGB B)  
VIDEO  
B
RGB A  
Note:  
MUTING  
VOLUME  
• If you want to make these information appear automatically  
when you change the input mode, see “Showing the  
On-screen When Changing the Input Mode” on page 23.  
VOLUME –  
2 / 3  
5 /  
5
MENU/EXIT  
MENU/EXIT  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Showing the On-screen When Changing  
the Input Mode  
Prohibiting the Monitor’s Button Operations  
This function allows you to prohibit the button operations on  
the Monitor to prevent malfunction or avoid tampering.  
With this function, you can see the selected input mode and  
signal type when changing the input mode.  
1 On the remote control:  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“CONTROL LOCK.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“STATUS DISPLAY.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Control Lock  
function alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Status Display  
function alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
To cancel the Control Lock function, select “OFF.”  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
To cancel the Status Display function, select “OFF.”  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
Note:  
• Even when the Control Lock function is in use, the  
following operations are possible:  
– Operation to cancel the Control Lock function  
– All operations from the remote control  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
Setting the Remote-Controllable Input  
Setting the High-Definition Signal Types  
When connecting the external control unit to the REMOTE  
MAKE terminal, you need to set the desired input to use,  
which you can select from the connected external control unit.  
You can select one of the High-Definition (HD) signal types  
through the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals — 1080i or  
1035i. Normally set it to “1080i.”  
• Without setting “COMPO./RGB B” correctly, you cannot  
show any picture though you select the COMPONENT  
input (see page 20).  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
“REMOTE SWITCH.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“HD SIGNAL MODE.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Remote Switch  
Mode changes as follows:  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the HD signal type  
alternates between “1080i” and “1035i.”  
MODE1: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“VIDEO B” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
• You can select either “1080i” and “1035i” according to  
the HD signal you input — whichever gives you  
proportionally shaped pictures.  
MODE2: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“COMPONENT/RGB B” when controlled  
from the external control unit.  
MODE3: Input alternates between “VIDEO A” and  
“RGB A” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
MODE4: Input alternates between “VIDEO B” and  
“COMPONENT/RGB B” when controlled  
from the external control unit.  
MODE5: Input alternates between “VIDEO B” and  
“RGB A” when controlled from the external  
control unit.  
MODE6: Input alternates between “COMPONENT/  
RGB B” and “RGB A” when controlled from  
the external control unit.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Speed of the Internal Cooling Fan  
Adjusting the White Balance  
Set the speed of the internal cooling fan to “HIGH” when  
installing the Monitor vertically, so that the internal heat of  
the Monitor is released more effectively.  
G GAIN, B GAIN and R GAIN can be finely adjusted  
separately for “HIGH” and “LOW” settings of the color  
temperature.  
Note:  
1 On the remote control:  
• When installing this Monitor vertically, it is also required to  
attach the external cooling fan unit. (See page 13.)  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“WHITE BALANCE.”  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
3 Press 3 to display the White Balance  
“FAN SPEED.”  
Adjustment Menu.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
WHITE BALANCE:HIGH  
R
G
B
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
:
:
:
000  
001  
002  
+
–
sub menu  
reset  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the speed of the internal  
cooling fan changes as follows:  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
LOW:  
Initial setting. Normally select this.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to the  
HIGH:  
Select this when installing the Monitor  
vertically.  
item you want to adjust.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
5 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the other  
items.  
7 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) twice to exit from the menu  
operations.  
Notes:  
• Adjustable range will vary among the Monitors.  
• “MAX” may appear soon after you begin adjustment. This  
is normal but not a malfunction.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
To make an adjustment while viewing the adjustment  
bars  
After step 3 on page 25, proceed as follows:  
Setting the Clock and the Power On/Off Timer  
You can turn the Monitor on and off automatically with the  
Power On/Off timer.  
• Since you cannot use the timer functions without setting  
the clock, set the clock at first.  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “sub menu.”  
2 Press 3 to display the Sub Menu.  
The Sub Menu for R GAIN appears on the screen.  
• Setting the Clock  
You can also adjust the clock with the following procedure.  
:
000  
+
R
GAIN  
–
3 Press 5/∞ to select the Sub Menu you want to adjust.  
Each time you press the button, the Sub Menu changes as  
follows:  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
R GAIN  
G GAIN  
On the Monitor:  
B GAIN  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
4 Press 2/3 to adjust the selected item.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other items.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the Monitor) three times  
to exit from the menu operations.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
To reset the adjustments  
After step 3 on page 25, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
The confirmation screen appears.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“TIMER,” then press 3 to display the  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
Timer Menu.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the adjustments.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
Before the clock setting  
After the clock setting  
TIMER  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
:
:
:
:
:
––:––  
OFF  
––:––  
OFF  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
P
OWER-ON TIME  
P
OWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
21:20  
––:––  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PRESENT TIME,” then press 3.  
4 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“HOURS,” then press 2/3 repeatedly to  
adjust the hour (24 hour clock).  
5 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“MINUTES,” then press 2/3 repeatedly  
to adjust the minute.  
6 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) three times to exit from the  
menu operations.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Using the Power On/Off Timer  
Select the item you want to set in step 3 in “Setting the  
Clock” (page 26) and follow the instructions below.  
About the Timer Battery  
The timer clock works on the battery embedded in the  
Monitor.  
If the battery becomes weak or has already run out, a message  
appears on the TIMER, COLOR-REVERSE, and REFRESH  
menus.  
POWER-ON SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Power-On Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The Monitor automatically turns on at the time  
set in “POWER-ON TIME.”  
When the battery becomes weak (BATTERY LOW)  
“BATTERY LOW” appears on the screen.  
OFF: The Power-On Timer is deactivated.  
TIMER  
POWER-ON TIME  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
POWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
You can adjust the time to turn on the Monitor.  
Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in “Setting  
the Clock” (page 26).  
21:20  
BATTERY LOW  
SELECT: EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
POWER-OFF SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Power-Off Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The Monitor automatically turns off at the time  
set in “POWER-OFF TIME.”  
When the battery has run out (BATTERY EMPTY)  
“BATTERY EMPTY” appears on the screen.  
OFF: The Power-Off Timer is deactivated.  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
POWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
––:––  
OFF  
––:––  
OFF  
POWER-OFF TIME  
––:––  
You can adjust the time to turn off the Monitor.  
Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in “Setting  
the Clock” (page 26).  
BATTERY EMPTY  
SELECT: EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
To reset the timer setting  
The clock is reset and “PRESENT TIME” is shown as “-- : --.”  
• You cannot replace the battery yourself. Please consult your  
dealer to replace it.  
• Set the clock and the timer functions (Power On/Off Timer,  
Color-Reverse On/Off Timer, and Refresh On/Off Timer)  
again after replacing the battery.  
After step 2 on page 26, proceed as follows:  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
• You can use functions other than the timer functions  
without replacing the battery.  
key.  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
Using the Pixel Shift Function  
“POWER SAVE” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
This function periodically shift the position (pixels) of the  
displayed picture on the screen so that you can avoid the  
screen from being burned in.  
1 On the remote control:  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
:
123  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
E
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
SAVE1: The screen gets dim.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
SAVE2: The screen gets dimmer.  
OFF: The Power Save function is deactivate.  
To cancel the Power Save function, select “OFF.”  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“PIXEL SHIFT” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
Reducing the Afterimage Effect  
If the same image (pattern) is continuously displayed on the  
screen for a long time, the area on the screen corresponding to  
the image may vary in brightness, leaving an afterimage on  
the screen.  
You can reduce the afterimage by reversing the color of the  
image on the screen.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
You can activate/deactivate the function with the Color-  
Reverse On/Off Timer.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
3 Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Each time you press the button, the Pixel Shift function  
alternates between “ON” and “OFF.”  
• Display the image which has been caused the afterimage on  
the screen before starting the following procedure.  
To cancel the Pixel Shift function, select “OFF.”  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
Using the Power Save Function  
You can use this function to reduce the electrical consumption  
and to extend the lifetime of the Monitor’s screen.  
• The brightness of the screen will be reduced.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
1 On the remote control:  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To reset the Color-Reverse setting  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
After step 2 on the left column, proceed as follows:  
“COLOR-REVERSE” (on the second  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
page), then press 3.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
E
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Note:  
• The Color-Reverse function requires considerable time to  
reduce the afterimage. Deactivate the function temporarily  
at intervals of 30 minutes-1 hour and check the screen if the  
afterimage still remains or not. Set the function to off if the  
afterimage has been reduced.  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the item you want  
to set and set the item as follows.  
COLOR-REVERSE  
You can activate/deactivate the function manually.  
Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
Refreshing the Screen  
After the power is turned off, a whitish image may be left on  
the screen. In that case, leave the monitor in a white back state  
for a while, and the image will disappear.  
You can activate/deactivate the function with the Refresh  
On/Off Timer.  
ON:  
The function is activated immediately after  
exiting the menu operations.  
OFF: The function is deactivated.  
TIMER: Select this when you use the Color-Reverse  
On/Off Timer.  
Note:  
• Set the clock (see page 26) and select “TIMER,” before  
using the Color-Reverse On/Off Timer.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
START SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Color-Reverse On Timer.  
Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically activated at the  
time set in “START TIME.”  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
OFF: The Color-Reverse On Timer is deactivated.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
START TIME  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
You can adjust the time to activate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
END SET  
You can activate/deactivate the Color-Reverse Off Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically deactivated at the  
time set in “END TIME.”  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
“REFRESH” (on the second page) then  
press 3.  
OFF: The Color-Reverse Off Timer is deactivated.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
END TIME  
You can adjust the time to deactivate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
:
123  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) repeatedly to exit from the  
menu operations.  
MODEL :GM-X50  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
(To be continued on the next page)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Convenient Functions  
(Continued)  
Note:  
3 Press 5/∞ to select the item you want  
• The Refresh function requires considerable time to reduce  
the afterimage. Deactivate the function temporarily at  
intervals of 30 minutes-1 hour and check the screen if the  
afterimage still remains or not. Set the function to off if the  
afterimage has been reduced.  
to set and set the item as follows.  
REFRESH  
You can activate/deactivate the function manually.  
• Press 2/3 to select the desired setting.  
ON:  
The function is activated immediately after  
exiting the menu operations.  
Notes on the Color-Reverse/Refresh Timer  
OFF:  
The function is deactivated.  
• Once you set the Color-Reverse/Refresh timer, the timer  
function is still activated even if you turn off the power.  
If you turn on the power after the “START TIME” you  
set, Color-Reverse/Refresh function is activated.  
To cancel the function, select “OFF” in the menu  
(see pages 29 and 30).  
TIMER: Select this when you use the Refresh On/Off  
Timer.  
Note:  
• Set the clock (see page 26) and select “TIMER,” before  
using the Refresh On/Off Timer.  
START SET  
• The Color-Reverse timer is deactivated when you turn  
on or off the Color-Reverse function manually.  
The Refresh timer works in the same way as mentioned  
above.  
Select “TIMER” in the menu to control the functions  
automatically (see pages 29 and 30).  
You can activate/deactivate the Refresh On Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically activated at the  
time set in “START TIME.”  
OFF: The Refresh On Timer is deactivated.  
START TIME  
You can adjust the time to activate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 in  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
Resetting All the Setup Menu Settings  
You can reset all the following Setup Menu settings at a time,  
except the use time (HOUR METER).  
END SET  
1 On the remote control:  
You can activate/deactivate the Refresh Off Timer.  
• Press 2/3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”  
ON: The function is automatically deactivated at the  
time set in “END TIME.”  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
OFF: The Refresh Off Timer is deactivated.  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
END TIME  
You can adjust the time to deactivate the function.  
• Set the hour and minute following steps 4 to 6 on  
“Setting the Clock” (page 26).  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) repeatedly to exit from the  
menu operations.  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To reset the Reflesh function setting  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to  
After step 2 above, proceed as follows:  
“reset” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
1 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “reset.”  
2 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
2/2  
key.  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
3 Press 3 again to reset the setting.  
:
123  
Ver.  
CATEGORY  
A
E
.
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor).  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press 3.  
4 Press 3 again to reset all the Menu  
The confirmation screen appears.  
settings and adjustments.  
The power is turned off, then turned on again  
automatically.  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
key.  
"NO" then MENU key.  
Confirming the Use Time and Model Information  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
You can confirm the hours of use and the model information  
on the Setup Menu.  
This may be necessary when you ask for any service.  
4 Press 3 again to reset all the Setup  
Menu settings.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
Resetting All the Menu Settings  
You can reset all the Menu settings and adjustments at a time,  
except the use time (HOUR METER).  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
1 On the remote control:  
Press VOLUME – while holding MENU/  
EXIT to display the Setup Menu.  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
On the Monitor:  
Press 2 while holding MENU to display  
the Setup Menu.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
2 Keep pressing 5/∞ until the second  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
Cursor (3)  
page of the Setup Menu appears.  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
2 Press 5/∞ to move the cursor (3) to “all  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
reset” (on the second page).  
• The Setup Menu consists of two pages. If you keep  
pressing 5/∞, you can move to the other page from  
the current page.  
Hours of use  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
Model  
Information  
SET-UP MENU  
PIXEL SHIFT  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
HOUR METER x100h  
MODEL :GM-X50  
2/2  
3 Confirm the hour of use and model  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
information.  
• The displayed value for the hours of use is divided by  
100. To calculate the actual hours of use, multiply the  
displayed value by 100.  
:
123  
Ver.  
A
E
CATEGORY  
.
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
4 Press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on the  
Monitor) once to exit from the menu  
operations.  
3 Press 3.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
all reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES" then  
"NO" then MENU key.  
key.  
Notes:  
• The value for the hours of use is added by one hour unit. If  
you use the monitor within one hour, it will not be added to  
the hours of use.  
• The period when the monitor is on standby (the power  
lamp glows orange) will not be added to the hours of use.  
To cancel the reset, press MENU/EXIT (or MENU on  
the Monitor).  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Classifications  
Main Menu  
Picture Adjustment Menu  
:+01  
CONTRAST  
–
+
VIDEO  
A
MAIN MENU  
PICTURE ADJ.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
FUNCTION SELECT  
STATUS DISPLAY  
PICTURE ADJ.  
:+01  
BRIGHT  
–
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
CHROMA  
PHASE  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
+
:+01  
CHROMA  
–
+
:+01  
PHASE  
–
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ENTER:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
+
:+01  
SHARPNESS  
+
–
*1 *2  
*1 *2  
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
then  
key.  
key.  
Size/Position Adjustment Menu  
:+01  
H
SIZE  
++  
+
+
SIZE/POSITION ADJ.  
H
H
V
V
SIZE  
POSITION  
SIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+01  
00  
–02  
00  
00  
00  
:+01  
H
POSITION  
SIZE  
++  
+ +  
POSITION  
DOT CLOCK  
CLOCK PHASE  
sub menu  
reset  
:+01  
:+01  
V
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
V
POSITION  
:+01  
DOT CLOCK  
–
+
3
3
*
*
:+01  
CLOCK PHASE  
–
+
reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
"YES"  
key.  
"NO" then MENU  
key.  
Function Selection Menu  
FUNCTION SELECT  
COLOR TEMP.  
ASPECT  
SIGNAL MODE  
COMPO./RGB  
SYNC TERM.  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
HIGH  
PANORAMIC  
AUTO  
RGB  
HIGH  
B
B
reset  
Are you sure?  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
then  
key.  
key.  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
5
4
6
*
*
*
Status Display  
VIDEO  
NTSC  
A
Input currently selected  
Input video signal  
Ex. When “VIDEO A” input is selected.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE ADJ. (Picture adjustment): See page 16.  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
Adjusts the contrast of the picture.  
Adjusts the brightness of the picture.  
Adjusts the color density of the picture.  
Adjusts the color phase.  
CHROMA*1  
PHASE*2  
SHARPNESS  
sub menu  
reset  
Adjusts the outlines of the picture.  
Displays the fine adjustment bar.  
Resets the Picture Adjustment Menu settings to defaults.  
SIZE/POSITION ADJ. : See page 17.  
H SIZE  
Adjusts the horizontal screen size.  
H POSITION  
Adjusts the horizontal screen position.  
V SIZE  
Adjusts the vertical screen size.  
V POSITION  
DOT CLOCK*3  
Adjusts the vertical screen position.  
Adjusts to eliminate stripes or flickering. Use with “CLOCK PHASE.”  
Normally, no adjustment is needed.  
Adjusts to eliminate stripes or flickering. Use with “DOT CLOCK.”  
Normally, no adjustment is needed.  
CLOCK PHASE*3  
sub menu  
reset  
Displays the fine adjustment bar.  
Resets Size/position Adjustment Menu settings to defaults.  
FUNCTION SELECT: See pages 19 to 21.  
COLOR TEMP.  
Adjusts the color temperature.  
Use when the picture is reddish or bluish.  
Selects the horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen.  
• Selects a color system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM, N4.43 (NTSC 4.43), PAL60) when VIDEO A or  
ASPECT*4  
SIGNAL MODE*5  
VIDEO B input is selected. Normally, set to “AUTO.”  
• Selects a scan system—480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035i), 1080/50i—  
when COMPONENT input is selected. Normally, set to “AUTO.”  
Selects the usage of the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals either as the COMPONENT input  
terminal or as the RGB B input terminal.  
Adjusts the resistance of RGB B input terminals.  
Resets the Function Selection Menu settings to defaults.  
COMPO./RGB B  
SYNC TERM.*6  
reset  
STATUS DISPLAY: See page 22.  
Shows the input mode and signal type on the screen.  
*1 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC, PAL, or SECAM signal, or component signal.  
*2 Adjustable when viewing the NTSC signal or component signal.  
*3 Adjustable when RGB A or RGB B input is selected.  
*4 Not adjustable when viewing the following component signals—720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), and 1080/50i. ( In  
such a case, “ASPECT” does not appear on the display.)  
*5 Adjustable when VIDEO A, VIDEO B, or COMPONENT input is selected.  
*6 Adjustable when RGB B input is selected.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Classifications  
(Continued)  
Setup Menu  
White Balance Adjustment Menu  
SET-UP MENU  
1/2  
:
000  
+
R
GAIN  
STATUS DISPLAY  
CONTROL LOCK  
REMOTE SWITCH  
HD SIGNAL MODE  
FAN SPEED  
WHITE BALANCE  
TIMER  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
MODE1  
1080i  
LOW  
–
WHITE BALANCE:HIGH  
R
G
B
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
:
:
:
000  
001  
002  
:+001  
+
G
GAIN  
+
–
–
sub menu  
reset  
:–002  
B
GAIN  
+
–
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
"YES"  
"NO" then MENU  
key.  
key.  
Reset Confirmation Screen  
Timer Menu  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
POWER-ON SET  
OWER-ON TIME  
POWER-OFF SET  
POWER-OFF TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
14:25  
ON  
08:26  
ON  
TIMER  
PRESENT TIME  
HOURS  
:
:
:
14:25  
14  
25  
P
MINUTES  
21:20  
TIMER  
POWER-ON TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
08:26  
08  
26  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
TIMER  
POWER-OFF TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
21:20  
21  
20  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
Color-Reverse Menu  
SET-UP MENU  
2/2  
COLOR-REVERSE  
PIXEL SHIFT  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
COLOR-REVERSE  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ON  
08:06  
ON  
21:47  
COLOR-REVERSE  
POWER SAVE  
COLOR-REVERSE  
REFRESH  
reset  
all reset  
START SET  
START TIME  
END SET  
END TIME  
reset  
START TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
08:06  
08  
06  
HOUR METER x100h  
:
123  
MODEL  
:GM-X50  
Ver.  
.
A
E
COLOR-REVERSE  
CATEGORY  
END TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
21:47  
21  
47  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
Refresh Menu  
REFRESH  
REFRESH  
START SET  
START TIME  
END SET  
END TIME  
reset  
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ON  
12:10  
ON  
REFRESH  
START TIME  
HOURS  
:
:
:
12:10  
12  
10  
MINUTES  
14:24  
REFRESH  
END TIME  
HOURS  
MINUTES  
:
:
:
14:24  
14  
24  
ADJUST:  
SELECT:  
EXIT: MENU  
To “Reset Confirmation Screen”  
all reset  
Are you sure?  
then  
then  
"YES"  
"NO"  
key.  
key.  
MENU  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STATUS DISPLAY: See page 23.  
Sets if you want the input terminal and the type of signal to be indicated on the screen just after inputs are switched.  
CONTROL LOCK: See page 23.  
Sets the Monitor so that it cannot be operated with the buttons on itself.  
REMOTE SWITCH: See page 24.  
Set the selectable input terminals when controlling the Monitor with the external control unit.  
HD SIGNAL MODE: See page 24.  
Select the High-Definition (HD) signal type.  
FAN SPEED: See page 25.  
Sets the speed of the internal cooling fan.  
WHITE BALANCE: See page 25.  
Adjusts R GAIN, G GAIN and B GAIN finely each for “HIGH” and “LOW” settings of the color temperature.  
TIMER: See pages 26 and 27.  
Sets the clock and the Power On/Off Timer.  
PIXEL SHIFT: See page 28.  
Sets a screen saver.  
POWER SAVE: See page 28.  
Sets the power save function.  
COLOR-REVERSE: See page 28.  
Use to reduce the afterimage on the screen of the still picture by reversing the color.  
REFRESH: See page 29.  
Use to reduce the whitish image remaining on the screen after turning off the power.  
reset: See page 30.  
Resets the Setup Menu settings to defaults.  
all reset: See page 31.  
Resets the all menu settings and adjustments to defaults.  
HOUR METER x 100h: See page 31.  
Use to confirm the hours of use.  
MODEL: See page 31.  
Use to confirm the model information of the Monitor.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Solutions to common problems related to the Monitor are described here. If none of the solutions presented here solves the  
problem, unplug the Monitor and consult an authorized dealer or service center.  
Symptom  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
•Insert the power cord (plug) firmly.  
•Turn on the POWER switch.  
Page  
12  
Power is not supplied. •Is the power cord disconnected?  
•Is the POWER switch turned on?  
14  
Power is suddenly  
turned on or off.  
•Is the Power On/Off Timer activated? •Set the timer to “OFF” on the menu.  
26  
14  
Video image does not •Is the correct input selected?  
appear, or audio  
sound does not occur.  
•Select the correct input by pressing  
INPUT SELECT (VIDEO A, VIDEO B,  
COMPO./(RGB B) or RGB A) on the  
remote control (or INPUT on the  
Monitor).  
•Are the devices connected correctly?  
•Connect the devices correctly.  
•Set the devices correctly.  
•Set it correctly.  
11, 12  
—
•Are signals being supplied from the  
connected devices?  
•Is “COMPO./RGB B” set correctly if  
using the COMPONENT/RGB B  
terminals?  
20  
10  
•Are input signals (scanning frequency, •Check if the signal is appropriate  
etc.) appropriate?  
(scanning frequency, etc.), and input  
the appropriate signal.  
•Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
•Is volume set at minimum?  
•Adjust brightness on the menu.  
•Adjust volume.  
16  
14  
•Are the diagnostic lamps turned on?  
•Refer to “Self-diagnostic Indication,”  
and take an appropriate action.  
37  
The picture becomes •Is the signal RGB input?  
blurred.  
•Adjust DOT CLOCK and CLOCK  
PHASE using the menu.  
17  
•Is the RGB B connecting cord long?  
•Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
•Set the SYNC TERM. “LOW.”  
21  
16  
Color is abnormally  
dark or bright.  
•Adjust BRIGHT (brightness) using the  
menu.  
•Is picture quality (color density, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
•Adjust picture using the menu.  
16  
37  
20  
“TEMP. OVER” lights (or flashes) at the •Refer to “Self-diagnostic Indication,”  
right bottom of the screen.  
and take an appropriate action.  
Color is poor or  
unstable.  
•Is the correct broadcast system (color  
system) selected?  
•Set SIGNAL MODE (color system) to  
“AUTO.”  
•Are signals (scanning frequency, etc.) to •Check if the signal is appropriate  
connected devices appropriate?  
(scanning frequency, etc.), and input  
the appropriate signal.  
10  
29, 30  
17  
Color is suddenly  
reversed or whitened.  
•Is the Color-Reverse/Refresh timer  
activated?  
•Set “COLOR-REVERSE”/“REFRESH”  
to “OFF” on the menu.  
The picture is cut or  
shifted toward one  
side.  
•Is the size or position of the screen  
adjusted properly?  
•Adjust H SIZE, V SIZE, H POSITION  
or V POSITION using the menu.  
The remote control  
does not work.  
•Are the batteries correctly set?  
•Are the batteries exhausted?  
•Insert batteries correctly, observing the  
polarities (ª and ·).  
8
8
•Replace with new batteries.  
•Remove any blocking object.  
•Is there any object blocking the path  
between the remote control and remote  
sensor?  
—
•Is the Monitor too far away from you? •Move toward the Monitor, then operate  
the remote control.  
—
23  
The buttons on the  
Monitor do not work.  
•Is the Control Lock function in use?  
•Set the Control Lock function to “OFF”  
using the menu.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the trouble still persists, follow the procedure below:  
Self-diagnostic Indication  
When something abnormal occurs with the Monitor, this  
function informs you of the condition of the Monitor with  
self-diagnostic lamps, allowing for smooth service work.  
1 Check which lamps are lighting or flashing.  
On the Self-diagnostic Report Sheet (below), check the box  
next to “Lights” or “Flashes” of the corresponding lamp or  
lamps.  
Remote sensor  
•
Only one lamp may light or flash, or all three lamps  
may do so.  
1
2
3
2 Switch off the POWER switch on the back of the  
Monitor.  
Power lamp  
Self-diagnostic lamps (1 to 3)  
M
E
N
U
I
N
P
U
T
3 Unplug the power cord.  
4 Call your dealer and tell which lamps are lighting  
or flashing. (Copy and fax the Self-diagnostic  
Report Sheet below.)  
❑If the screen monitor turns off and self-diagnostic  
lamps light or flash  
If the self-diagnostic lamps light or flash in red, check the  
following before consulting the dealer where you  
purchased the Monitor.  
Note:  
If you switch on the main power immediately after switching  
it off (or after recovering from a brief power interruption), the  
self-diagnostic lamps may light (or flash), and no image may  
appear on the screen. In this case, switch off the main power  
again, wait for about 10 seconds, then switch it on again. If no  
self-diagnostic lamps light or flash, you can operate and use  
the Monitor as usual.  
• If self-diagnostic lamp 1 (upper) flashes, lamp 2 (middle)  
lights, and lamp 3 (lower) flashes  
This may be caused by the dusty intakes on the rear. If  
this happens, switch off the main power by POWER  
switch (set to “‡ (off)”), unplug the AC power cord,  
then clean the intakes by referring to the instruction on  
page 2.  
– After cleaning, switch on the Monitor’s main power  
again. If self-diagnostic lamps do not go off, consult  
your dealer immediately.  
Self-diagnostic Report Sheet  
❑If the screen monitor dims a little and “TEMP. OVER”  
lights (or flashes)  
If “TEMP. OVER” lights or flashes at the right bottom of the  
screen, check the following before consulting the dealer  
where you purchased the Monitor.  
Store name where you purchased the Monitor  
To  
Model Name:  
“TEMP. OVER” appears to warn you of the internal heat  
buildup, which is usually caused by accumulated dust  
around the intakes or by improper installation. If the cause  
of the internal heat buildup is eliminated, this indication  
disappears and the screen recovers the brightness.  
• If “TEMP. OVER” flashes in yellow  
Plasma Display Monitor  
GM-X50S  
The self-diagnostic lamps light or flash as listed on the  
following table. Please give me immediate advice or service if  
necessary.  
This may be caused by the dusty intakes on the rear. If  
this happens, switch off the main power by POWER  
switch (set to “‡ (off)”), unplug the AC power cord,  
then clean the intakes by referring to the instruction on  
page 2.  
Self-diagnostic lamps  
NO. Lamp position  
Conditions  
– After cleaning, switch on the Monitor’s main power  
again. If “TEMP. OVER” still flashes, this trouble may  
be caused by improper installation or improper  
location of the Monitor. In this case, consult your  
dealer immediately to solve this improper  
1
2
3
Upper  
Middle  
Lower  
& Lights  
& Flashes  
& Flashes  
& Lights  
& Lights  
& Flashes  
& Flashes  
installation and to improve the circumstances around  
the Monitor.  
• If “TEMP. OVER” lights in red  
TEMP. OVER  
& Lights  
“TEMP. OVER” will be shown for abut two minutes, the  
Monitor will shut off automatically, then the Self-  
diagonal lamps light in red. If this happens, switch off  
the main power by POWER switch (set to “‡ (off)”),  
unplug the AC power cord, then consult your dealer  
immediately.  
Your Name:  
Telephone No.:  
Address:  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Model name  
GM-X50S  
Frame color  
Silver  
Screen size  
Type 50 wide format  
16:9 (Wide format)  
1366 (H) x 768 (V)  
Aspect ratio  
Number of pixels displayed  
Number of colors displayed  
16.77 million (256 colors for each of RGB)  
110.7 cm x 62.2 cm, 127 cm  
Effective screen size  
(W x H, Diagonally)  
Weight  
50 kg  
External dimensions  
(W x H x D)  
123.2 cm x 74.3 cm x 10.3 cm  
* Excluding protruding parts  
Power requirements  
Rated input current  
AC 220 – 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
2.2 A  
Compatible systems  
VIDEO A, VIDEO B input  
NTSC, NTSC 4.43, PAL, PAL 60, SECAM  
COMPONENT input  
Audio power output  
480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i (1035/60i), 1080/50i  
SPEAKER OUT: 6 Ω to 8 Ω  
3 W + 3 W (TYP at impedance 6 Ω)  
Operating conditions  
Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C  
Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % (non-condensation)  
(Slightly variable depending on ambient conditions for installation.)  
VIDEO A  
Video input  
BNC terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
BNC terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Video output  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
VIDEO B  
Y/C input  
Y/C terminal x 1  
Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
C: 0.286 V(p-p), 75 Ω (for NTSC)  
C: 0.3 V(p-p), 75 Ω (for PAL/SECAM)  
Video input  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 1, 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
COMPONENT/RGB B *  
COMPONENT input  
BNC terminal x 3  
Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
PB/B-Y: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
PR/R-Y: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
B: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
RGB input  
BNC terminal x 5  
Analog RGB:  
R: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G on sync: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω (negative sync)  
Horizontal sync/Composite sync (HD/Cs):  
HD: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Cs: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Vertical sync (VD):  
VD: 1 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 1 kΩ (positive/negative polarity) / 75 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Audio input  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R) 500 mV(rms), high impedance  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RGB A  
RGB input  
D-sub 3-row 15-pin terminal x 1,  
Video signal: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
G on sync: 1 V(p-p), 75 Ω (negative sync)  
Horizontal sync/Composite sync (HD/Cs):  
HD: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Cs: 0.3 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Vertical sync (VD):  
VD: 1 V(p-p) to 5 V(p-p), 470 Ω (positive/negative polarity)  
Audio input  
Stereo mini jack terminal x 1  
500 mV(rms), high impedance  
REMOTE terminals  
RS-232C: D-sub 9-pin terminal x 1  
MAKE: Mini DIN 4 pin  
WIRED: Stereo mini jack terminal x 1  
OPTION terminal  
Used exclusively for JVC's optional parts  
AUDIO OUT terminals  
Pin jack terminal x 2 (L/R)  
Output impedance 600 Ω  
SPEAKER OUT (L/R) terminals  
Impedance 6 Ω to 8 Ω  
* To use the COMPONENT/RGB B terminals either as the COMPONENT input terminal or as the RGB B input terminal, you  
need to set “COMPO./RGB B” correctly (see page 20).  
• For easy understanding, pictures and illustrations are shown by being emphasized, omitted or composed, and may be more or  
less different from actual products.  
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Macintosh is registered  
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only, and may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
Options (not supplied)  
Stand Unit  
TS-CL01SG, TS-CL02SG  
Wall Mounting Unit  
Ceiling Suspension Unit  
Cooling Fan Unit  
Speaker Unit  
TS-C420P2W, TS-C420P6W, TS-C420P8W, TS-C420P9W  
TS-C420P3W  
TS-C01FANG  
TS-C500SPG  
• Consult your dealer to see if other options are available.  
Notice on transportation  
This Monitor is precision equipment and needs dedicated packing material for transportation.  
Never use any packing material supplied from other than JVC or JVC-authorized dealers.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
(Continued)  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals)  
• RS-232C terminal  
This is a female type connector.  
• Y/C terminal  
4
3
5
2
1
Pin number Signal name  
Pin number Signal name  
4
2
3
1
Pin number Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
DCD  
RD  
6
7
8
9
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
1
2
3
4
GND (Y)  
GND (C)  
TD  
Y
C
DTR  
GND  
8
6
9
7
• MAKE terminal  
• RGB Input Terminal  
6
Pin number Signal name  
Pin number Signal name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Red  
Green  
Blue  
9
10  
N/C  
GND  
GND  
N/C  
7
6
4
2
5
3
1
Pin number Signal name  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
GND  
1
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
8
N/C  
12  
SW2  
3
4
5
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
13  
HD/Cs  
VD  
SW1  
14  
SW DET  
GND  
15  
9
10  
15  
N/C  
External  
GND  
Dimensions  
Top view  
Side view  
Front view  
1232  
1125  
1107  
103  
35.5  
MENU INPUT  
Unit: mm  
1.5  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Printed in Japan  
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0304MKH-MW-VP  

Insignia Flat Panel Television NS 19E430A10 User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware 955X User Manual
IOGear Network Router GCS1108 User Manual
JL Audio Car Speaker SB S IMPRZA 10W6v2 User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television HD 56FC97 User Manual
JVC Speaker System CA UXH100 User Manual
JVC Speaker System RV NB70B User Manual
JVC Stereo Receiver RX 664VBK User Manual
Kettler Home Gym 07653 000 User Manual
Kompernass Bread Maker KH 2232 User Manual